《Veneofel: A Wonderful World of Magic, Imagination and A Certain Overpowered MC》


 Chapter 1 - A Youthful Day… And a Welcome!!!

    How much time does it take for a person''s life to completely change? A decade? A year? A month? A day? Well, it depends to the person, right? In that case, the answer to this question would be ''In a moment'' or ''Momentarily''. It depends to the crowd that are spectating on that person life. Since Moments can''t be measured, we can only assume that the change would happen soon. Even if it''s a decade, a year, a month or day, we can only presume that it will inevitably happen. Hence, Momentarily.


    Moments can be the only thing that can separate usual and unusual. A thin veil that segregates what we think is normal to those that is definitely not something of this world. Something that is so thin, almost unnoticed, yet something that reaches those that are drastically far-fetched. A gap that is so simple yet so wide and deep. That is why you should live like there is no tomorrow, because you don''t know when everything will change.


    A person''s life always changes. And all of us, albeit not simultaneously, will face these changes. That is why it is preferable to live your life at its fullest cause you''ll never know when your life would change for the better or for the worse.


    I guess that by now, you are wondering why I''ve been talking a lot about Change and lives and Moments like it was some kind of an essay for English class. Well, I''ve also got no idea why hahaha. It always happens to every person when they are bored enough, they began to ponder about the world, philosophy, and a series of hypothetical situations. We can say that boredom awakens the genius in all of us.


    Some of you might already be aware but I''ll say it anyway. Welcome to my story, albeit uneventful, I hope that you will enjoy it as much as I enjoy telling it. A couple of sentences from now, we will start the story and I''ll be once again be unaware of all of you. But no worries, I am confident that I would be able to tell you the story without being bored, even if it''s just my uneventful daily life as a student. Well, enough of this 4th wall breaking for now and let''s start this story with a clich��d ''Once upon a time''... Wait, I forgot... This is not a Fairy Tale!


    <hr>


    "-up"


    A muffled voice...


    "-ke up"


    Can''t you clear your voice a little? I can''t understand it.


    "Wake up"


    There, an understandable voice. Wait, ''Wake up''?


    "I won''t be bothered about him, if I were you."


    "But, Lunch time will be over soon. He''s already asleep even before lunch time started, he should''ve had enough by now."


    Noisy! I''m trying to sleep in here. Can you just lower your voice?


    "Knowing him, I bet he''s up all night reading about anything that interests him. You''ll just be exhausted if you keep on waking him up."


    "But... Hey, you sleepy head, wake up... I said WAKE UP JOHANNES!!!"


    "Whoa, calm down, I''m awake... just five minutes more."


    "Don''t just go back to sleep after you''ve just been woken!"


    "Ow! What the hell!"


    A girl holding a book with an angry expression and a boy looking somewhat uninterested, that''s what entered my sight at the moment I woke up. It seems that I''ve been struck by that thick book that the girl is holding.


    "How many times did I tell you that hitting someone while sleeping is rude, Mira? And Eric, don''t act like this is none of your business, you should''ve told this fella over here that hitting people with the book is rude in every sense of the word."


    "I tried to stop her, and you should''ve known by now that Mira is just that kind of person. You''re also at fault here, you''re sleeping even though there''s still a class."


    "Mira, even though we''re childhood friends, that doesn''t give you the right to bash my head with what you were holding. That''s still rude."


    "If you don''t stop bitching about everything, I will hit you with this book one more time, got it?"


    "Yes, I got it, just stop with the hitting."


    "An acceptable answer."


    I somehow managed to calm the demon and her wrath. But she''s smiling at me... I feel scared.


    "Now that you''re awake, let''s focus on the current problem in hand."


    "What are you saying, Mira, what problem?"


    "The fifth period is math, and there''s an assignment there."


    "Let me guess what you want to say."


    "What?"


    "You haven''t done your assignment yet and you want to copy mine, right?"


    "Wow, you really are a gen..."


    "I refuse."


    "I haven''t said anything yet and you''re already refusing? How rude!"


    "I bet you were occupied by your drama last night that you forgot to make your assignment, right?"


    "Hehehehe, just as you said."


    "*sigh* Only this time, I will not let you copy my assignment again, remember that."


    Mira suddenly lunge to me and gave me a hug.


    "Thank you, Hans! You really are my best friend."


    "I really can''t say no to you huh, Mira."


    "Hehehehe, were literally stuck with each other."


    "Um, I hope you''re not forgetting about me, one of your childhood friends."


    "Oh, Eric. I forgot that you''re here."


    "Wha-. Hey, you never really forgot about me, right? You never really forgot me, right, right?!"


    "Of course, that''s just a joke."


    "Well, leaving that aside, can you let me copy your assignment too?"


    "Even if I say no, you will copy it either way, right."


    Eric approached me and put his arm around my shoulder.


    "You really know me. As expected of my dear friend."


    "Stop dilly-dallying and start working. You only have 5 minutes before the bell ring."


    ""Ok""


    They replied simultaneously.


    <hr>


    Elmira Aslanov(Mira) and Eric Hagelin(Eric) are my Childhood Friends. We''ve been stuck together ever since Kindergarten. Mira and I are next-door neighbors. We met Eric on the kindergarten school and we''ve been stuck together ever since. Mira and Eric would often go to my house for study groups, although I''m the only one teaching the two of them. Mira belongs to the volleyball club while Eric is at Karate Club. Basically, they are both muscleheads. They are both athletic but weak at studies, that is why I''m always the one tutoring them. We''re 17 y/o and the three of us are currently at our Sophomore Years on high school.


    By the way, I am Johannes Aarvold. I like to acquire knowledge, no matter what medium. Surfing the internet, reading books, listening to radio, watching television etc. All for the sake of gaining more knowledge. I do not belong at any club because it would conflict with my Library visiting times. I''m always at our school library to read. By now, it is not an overstatement to say that I''ve already memorized everything in that library. It is my joy when I read new books in that library.


    <hr>


    A few minutes have passed since they started copying my assignment, the bell rang. A few minutes after that, the teacher entered the classroom.


    "Okay, go back to your seats, the class will start now."Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.


    """Ok!"""


    The class simultaneously replied.


    "Hans, thank you for the assignment, I''ll treat you when we go home."


    "Of course! That''s not free you know."


    "Hehehehe, I''ll treat you too, even if it''s expensive."


    "No need, Mira. I know you''re in a tight spot right now because of your allowance."


    "So you noticed, huh. Well then, I''ll just accompany the two of you and we''ll eat together. Of course, it''s your treat, Eric."


    "Huh?! That''s not fair!"


    "Hey, the three of you in the back, take your seats, the classes are starting."


    """Ok!"""


    "This talk is not yet finished, we''ll decided this after school."


    "Just give it up Eric, it''s settled."


    Eric looked like he was going to cry at any moment while Mira happily skipped towards her seat.


    The Afternoon Class Started afterwards.


    <hr>


    After class, Mira head towards the Volleyball clubroom while Eric head towards the dojo. I don''t have anything to do. I''ve been left behind.


    "*sigh* I''ll just head to the library while waiting for their club activities to end."


    While heading towards the Library, I saw a truck beside the entrance. The truck was full of books, old and new. My eyes were glittering with this development, I can''t wait to read the newly arrived books. Therefore, I increased my walking pace to be able to reach the library sooner. As they say, ''No one can ever stop a man longing for knowledge''. I guess I''m the only one who said that. Anyway, off we go, to the Library!


    <hr>


    "I can''t get enough of this smell!"


    I''ve reached the library and headed towards the newly-added books.


    "The smell of new books really stimulates me!"


    To many good books, I can''t decide what to read first! I have plenty of time so might as well skim through all of them.


    "This looks interesting. Oh, and this too... And this too. Oooh, they have the sequel now. Yes, a new series from that author. I heard he changed his style of writing. Oh wait, they have this too. Ahh, I am in heaven!"


    After skimming through the seemingly endless pile of books, I''ve selected the ones that I would read. I currently have my hands full of books that I can''t wait to read. I immediately head towards one of the reading cubicle at the corner and drop all the books I''m holding.


    "Now, I can finally start reading all these masterpieces. Ahh, I really am excited. Ahh Ahh... Wait, I''ve almost lost myself there. I need to be careful not to be misunderstood and be labeled a pervert by someone that would walk in here."


    I reached towards a book in the table. As I''m holding a book, something else caught my attention. There was a book in there that I didn''t remember picking up.


    The book looks like a normal hardbound leather books. The leather cover is blue with what appears to be metal forming an ''X'' shape with round in the middle on the round is what appears to be a coat of arm of a country. The coat of arm has a shield in the middle with both Dragon and Lion on the side and what appears to be a crown at the top of the shield. The coat of arm can''t be compared with the ones that exist in the other countries. Looks like this is a coat of arm of a small kingdom that I am not aware. At the side of the book there seems to be the title of the book written in a language that I don''t know. Considering that I''ve known all the different languages existing because of the research I conduct during my younger years, this is definitely a first for me. I put down the book that I''m currently holding and reach towards the Blue book. The moment I held the book, the writings on the side of the book changed into English. The title of the book appeared on English language. I was surprised by what I saw. Apparently, the title of the book is ''A new story in a new life'', Pretty vague for a Book title.


    "Might as well read this. Looks interesting enough for me."


    I started reading the book. The content of the book is nothing special. The story is about the daily life of a boy starting from his childhood. It was a normal Daily life story of a boy with his friends. Even though the story is simple, I can''t shake the uneasiness in my system. The story is weird in a sense of the characters having no names, only their characteristic. The Boy has friends called the Girl and the Other Boy. The story itself is awful. There is no great development and only focuses on the life of the Boy which is the protagonist. As I continue reading the book, I realized something.


    "The story is strangely similar to the story of my life."


    The characters, their role, everything seems so similar. The Boy is strangely similar to me. Also, the Friends of the Boy is weirdly similar to Mira and Eric. All the events in the book seems to be from my own life. Even though my memories were a bit fuzzy from when I was young, It still feels like I''ve been in that situation before. It becomes more and more weird the further I read it.


    I was so engulfed with the book that I didn''t notice that the sunlight''s already gone and the stars slowly resurfaced. I didn''t even notice that someone is approaching me from behind. Someone suddenly pat my back and in my shock, I jump from where I was sitting.


    "Hey, Hans!"


    "Whoa! Mira, stop with those kind of greetings, you might give me heart attack. Oh, Eric, you were here too."


    "We''ve come to pick you up, Hans."


    "Okay, wait a minute, I''ll just borrow this book."


    After borrowing the blue book from the librarian, the three of us exit the library and went to the nearest fast food chain.


    "So, I''m really the one that will pay for all of this, huh."


    "Sorry to drop all the expenses to you, since Mira is short right now, and I already spent my allowance to buy new books, I hope you will understand us."


    "Sorry Eric, I will treat you someday."


    "Okay, I understand. Since Hans helped me in my assignment, I''ll be the one paying for all of this."


    "Thanks Eric! You really are my Best Friend."


    "You''ve already said that to Hans during the lunch period, right. Conniving Woman."


    """Hahahahaha"""


    If I were to describe the scene right now, I would say ''calming''. It really is calming when I''m with this two, even though they are a bit hyper, I can''t imagine myself without them. I would be a loner by now if I hadn''t met these guys. And because of that Blue Book, I can even appreciate my friends more because it made me remember all the things that we did... All the things that they did to support me. I can''t ask for a more reliable friend than of what I currently have. That''s why I love them both.


    After eating, we went straight home. Eric departed from us first. Right now, only Mari and I are walking together.


    "Ahhh, I''m full. I can''t go on."


    "That''s what you get when you try to eat 3 quarter pounder and fries. Why can''t you act more girly every once in a while."


    "You really know how to ruin someone''s mood, don''t you, Hans."


    It seems like I pissed her off a little.


    "I''m sorry, I didn''t mean it. It''s just because... you''re cute Mira, you have the curves in right places. I can say without a doubt that you are beautiful. If you act more girly, then men will begin to flock you even more than before. You''ll be popular."


    Mira became silent for a while, then she suddenly talked with a soft and gentle voice.


    "You know what, Hans? I don''t really care about the other people, I don''t really care about what they want to see from me. I just want to be who I am. I don''t want to be flocked by men and I certainly do not want to be popular. Being with you and Eric is enough for me. I can be myself when I am with you both."


    My cheek unintentionally blushed, who would''ve thought that a demon woman like her has a softer, gentler and cute side like this.


    "Hehehehe. Heck, I don''t even care if I won''t be married. If I cannot be myself when I married a guy, then I''ll not marry anyone."


    "You know, if everyone doesn''t accept you for who you are... I will be here to accept all of you."


    Silence follows.


    Holy Shit! What did I just say, it looks like I proposed to marry her, didn''t I? Oh My God, my heart is beating so fast, I really am nervous right now. Hans, you idiot! Why did you say that? This is the most embarrassing thing that I said to a woman, moreover, to my childhood friend. Hold on, why is she so quiet.


    I glance to Mira and saw her covering her face while her ears are really red and her smile can''t be hidden by her hands.


    Oh My God, she''s overjoyed. What the hell! So, all this time, she also has the same feelings for me like I feel for her. This just turned into something out of hand. What should I do, what should I do? Should I be the one to break the silence, Should I wait for her response? I don''t know anymo-


    "Is that true?"


    She Broke the Silence! I need to answer fast, I need the right answer.


    "Y-yes, it''s true."


    "R-r-really?"


    I need to calm my nerves.


    "*sigh* All the things that I said, it''s all true. I will not back out of my word."


    "Then-"


    She went in front of me and stand close to me that I can feel hear her breathing. She smiled so sincerely, different from the smile she showed me before. This smile will make even the most stonehearted person''s heart skip a beat.


    "-I look forward to that day, Johannes."


    I can''t breathe right now. I didn''t know that my Childhood friend could be this cute. I really want to kiss her right now if she permitted me, but I won''t do that, I''m a gentleman after all. But it is true that I want to keep her. She''s so cute! Wait, I need to give her a reply. After what she said to me, I have to make sure that I reply sincerely.


    "It''s my pleasure, Elmira"


    Our trip home has been engulfed in silence. Not in an unnerving manner but in a calming one.


    We reached our houses a few minutes after that exchange. Mira is still blushing and so am I.


    "Good Night, Mira."


    "Good Night, Hans."


    <hr>


    That night, I can''t seem to calm down. All might nerves are still wrecking me even after 2 hours have already past. Whatever I do, I can''t seem to erase Mira''s face in my mind.


    "Haa! I need to find something that will keep me busy. Anything that can be used to redirect these feelings right now. That''s right, I have the Blue Book with me. I should''ve read it sooner."


    I reached inside my bag and grab the Blue Book. I lay to the bed while then I read the book.


    My nerve wreck immediately disappeared as I continue to read the book. The story became more and more familiar to me. Now I can really conclude that the scenes in the story are those that I''ve already experienced. The further I read, the weirder I feel. It feels like I''m spectating my own life. I know what will happen and that is really what is happening in the story of the book.


    I don''t know how many hours have past, I don''t even care. I was nearing the end of the Book. As I came close to the ending, I felt a lot more unease. As I Flip to the last 12 Pages, what I saw was definitely chilling. It was about the things that happened today. From the moment I woke up to the moment I slept in the class, It''s all in here. It feels like someone is deliberately stalking me and recording everything it saw. I can''t control my unease. I felt a lot more scared and weirded out. Even my exchange with Mira is in here. All the words delivered by us was written there precisely. As I flipped to the last page, what I saw brought chills in my spine. It was describing me, laying in the bed while reading the book about my life. At that moment, I felt genuinely scared. I don''t know why but I can''t stop shivering. At that moment, the last page shined. I was barely able to see because of that. The moment that my eyes are able to see, I looked in the page that shined a while ago and there are new words written on it.


    "Welcome to the New World, welcome to your new story."


    After reading the added words out loud, the book closed itself. The coat of arm in the middle of the ''X'' design moved like they are pushing the seal out of the way. After they pushed it far enough, the ''X'' designed retracted itself. The only thing in the cover of the book is the blue leather cover and the ''X'' design and the coat of arms are nowhere to be seen. Then the book burst open, the pages shining. My mind can''t comprehend what''s happening, and so is my eyes. My eyes were blinded by the light emitted by the book. Few moments after that, as my eyes were able to see, I looked around only to be surprised. I was engulfed by light and it looks like I am floating in a space without any thing, an empty void engulfed in light. At that time, only one thing comes onto my mind and I''m itching to shout it.


    "WHAT THE HELL IS THIS!!!"

 Chapter 2 – An Insufferable Situation… And an Intolerable Ghost.

    I��m currently surrounded by nothingness, if you ask me why, I don��t know what to say. The only thing that��s in my mind right now is confusion and an urge to curse the one who brought me here. I managed to calm myself under this absurd situation. First of all, let me assess the situation:


    I��m currently floating on what appears like the equivalent of space if it was painted in pure white. I can move my body but no matter what I do, I can��t move away from my position. I can��t describe anything anymore because�� well��. There��s nothing else to describe, literally nothing. And when there��s nothing to do, people became irritated. And that is what I��m feeling right now.


    ��AHHH!!! Geez, for god��s sake! How long do this thing wants to confine me here! Come on, like, there��s nothing to do in here, I can��t move away, I��m surrounded by nothing but white, at least let someone explain to me what��s going on in here. I would really appreciate even a brochure. *sigh* Why is this happening to me! I just want to read books and gain knowledge, what��s wrong with that! I guess, this won��t even work, huh. *sigh*��


    Looks like nothing will happen even if I shout to my heart��s content. Looks like I can only hope for someone to find the book and somehow find a way to undo all of this. It is likely that Mom would get worried and open the door. In that moment, she would undoubtedly notice the weird book in my bed. I wish she would find it as fast as possible, I��m starting to get irritated and weird in every passing moment in this weird place.


    <hr>


    A few minutes after that, I was returned back to my room. I don��t know what happened or why it happened but one thing is for sure, I have returned back from that dull, anger-inducing place. When I saw the blue book, I immediately throw it in the opposite side of the room. I refuse to lower my guard because something might happen for the second time.


    I really am glad to be back. I wouldn��t know what to do if I were to be stuck there for a long time. I really am thankful��


    ��or so I thought.


    It��s been three whole days ever since I��ve been stuck in this place. I tried anything I can do. I��ve shouted until my throat hurts, I cried until I can��t cry, I recklessly move my body until I can��t move anymore. I don��t even have the strength to be angry or irritated. I just feel�� drained. But even if I��m exhausted, I somehow don��t feel hunger. It��s been three days so I thought that I should be near death because of hunger, but even right now, I don��t feel hungry. This place somehow trying to contain me alive and sustain me without dying. Compared to this situation, death seems to be more humane.


    ��Death sure sounds more appealing to me right now, than this.��


    At that moment, I heard something that resembles a voice.


    ��Can *** **ar *e��


    Yes, definitely a voice. And a deep one, if I may add.


    ��Can you hear me?��


    I need to answer, but my body refuses to do what I want. I somehow manage to produce an answer after a few moments.


    ��Yes�� I can��


    ��That��s good to know. First of all, I would like to apologize for this sudden summon.��


    ��You better be. You don��t know how angry, exhausted and uncomfortable I am these past 3 days. So?��


    ��So�� what?��


    ��What took you so long. I ��ve been stuck in here for 3 whole days. If you can, you should��ve done this as soon as I��ve been transported here.��


    ��The truth is�� I��ve been so indulged in a game I��m playing that I ended up forgetting about you.��


    ��Huh?!��


    I��ve heard something extremely important just now.


    ��Uhm�� There is a game that I downloaded 3 days ago. I said to myself that I would just try the game and go to you after that, but I didn��t expect the game to be so immersive that I ended up completing it a day later. The game was so good that I don��t want to leave any content of the game undiscovered. So I ended up trying to have 100% completion. And it took me two days before I get 100%. After that, I remembered that you are still in the field I created and rushed in here.��


    My eyes started to twitch. The energy that I thought was gone a moment ago began swelling back to me in an unprecedented speed. My blood quickly boiled and head towards my head.


    ��You know what I want to do right now?��


    ��W-w-what is i-it?��


    The voice sounded shaky.


    ��I want to hug you and give you lots of kisses and give you a really warm welcome. I also want to give you sweets.��


    ��Really!��


    ��You really thought I would say that?��


    ��Huh?��


    ��YOU ****ING MO********ER!!! YOU FU***** CO*****ING ASSHOLE!!! YOU F***ER!!! HERE I AM TRYING TO FIGURE OUT WHAT I NEED TO DO IN HERE FOR THREE F***ING DAYS!!! I REALLY THOUGHT THAT IT IS FOR SOME NOBLE MYSTERIOUS REASON AND WHAT I WOULD HEAR FROM YOU?! YOU SON OF A B***H PLAYING A MO********ING GAME. I WANT TO PUNCH A HOLE IN YOUR STOMACH. I WANT TO PUNCH YOUR FACE IF YOU EVER HAVE ONE. I REALLY WANT TO F***ING KILL YOU RIGHT NOW!!! YOU F***TARD!��


    I tried to calm myself by inhaling and exhaling a few times. I somehow manage to lower my anger into manageable level.


    ��I-i-I��m r-r-really s-s-sorry!!!��


    I can feel the fear and caution from the voice. I admit that I might overreacted a little. I guess all those days have gotten to my head and explode in an extravagant rampage of curses.


    ��Ahh Geez. Just forget about all that happened just now. I forgive you. Now? What do you want from me?��


    ��I summoned you here with just a single reason in my mind. Mr. Johannes Aarvold, would you please save my world.��


    ��Not interested.��


    ��Thank you so much, you don��t know how�� wait, what did you say?��


    ��I said, not interested.��


    ��Why!��


    ��First of all you dragged me into this without my permission, then you let me suffer here for three whole days and you expect me to save your world which has no connections to me or whatever? I hope you��re not getting your hopes up when you asked me to save your world.��


    ��But that would be for a noble cause.��


    ��Don��t care.��


    ��You will be famous!��


    ��Don��t like.��


    ��You will be rich!��


    ��Don��t want.��


    ��You will have a lot of girls!��


    ��Not interested.��Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    ��I can��t really convince you?��


    ��Yes, you won��t be able to convince me. So, hurry up and return me to my own world.��


    ��Uhm, there would be a little problem about that.��


    ��What?��


    ��The truth is, once I summoned you, I can��t return you back. I really am sorry.��


    ��That is too big to be called a ��little problem��. *sigh* Ok then, I will help.��


    ��Wait, why��d you suddenly agreed to help me?��


    ��Well, I kinda expected this to happen when I heard that you summoned me. Some of the books I read have this kind of plot so�� there��s that. But I��m not saying that I don��t want to go back to my world. The moment you discover how to return me home, tell me immediately. If you were to keep the information, I will come back to you and personally hit you. By the way, you are still not entirely forgiven for keeping me inside this space for 3 whole days, remember that.��


    ��I understand. I would love to share everything to you. But even if you want to hit me, you wouldn��t be able to do it.��


    ��Huh? And why is that?��


    ��It��s because I do not exist anymore. I��m just a fragment of my former self lingering and waiting for the right time for the right someone to read that book.��


    ��And by the book, you mean the Blue Book?��


    ��Yes, that��s it. I used the little power I have when I am living to send that book into your world, For someone to read it.��


    ��But the content of the book is just my story. It isn��t even finished.��


    ��That��s the point. The one who would read their story up to the point in the present will have a path opened for them. A path that can change their lives. A path that can make even the wimpiest of the wimp into a hero. That��s what the book is all about. Knowing your journey from the start and uncovering another possibility for the future.��


    ��You kind of make it sound dramatic that it normally was. I bet that the truth is the book has a certain condition. The condition being that the user should be able to reach the end of the book so that they can be deemed ��worthy��. Am I right?��


    ��That is the general idea, sorry for making it complicated as it is.��


    ��I knew it. Then? What should I do now that I accepted your request. By the way, I don��t want to go where I don��t have the knowledge on where am I going. Can you tell me anything about your world?��


    ��Veneofel, That is my the name of my world. A world full of luscious sceneries and occupied by several races. The Dominant races are Humans and Lareans, or what you call elves in your world. There are other races such as Beastmen, Mnesians, Drageans, Demonkin, Aruvians and Phaerax, eight races in total. That��s the all the basic knowledge that you need to know about my world. You will learn more about my world once I send you there.��


    ��Ok, I get it. So�� I have a few questions in my mind. First is, I want to know the current situation of your world, and why am I going to be sent there. I already have a guess about why, I just want to confirm if my assumptions are correct.��


    ��Well you see, Laotea, the largest continent in Veneofel, was once a peaceful continent. When I say peaceful, I don��t mean ��peaceful�� that there is no fighting. Of course, there are some disputes between humans, interracial disputes and war among the eight races, that is what shaped our history. I said peaceful because, the races are now cohabitating with each other. That changes when the Demons wages war in against the continent. Those demons are living in a separate continent below the Laotea, the name is Balros. Balros is dubbed as ��Dark Continent�� by everyone because it is occupied by demons. After the demons waged war to Laotea and the kingdoms and empires in there, they began to advance their forces and start conquering every settlement that they pass by, ravaging the villages and making its citizens slave. They have already conquered the Kingdom of Thalirr, the nearest kingdom in the south. Those demons follow a leader, The Demon King. There are many instances of the united kingdoms and empires trying to kill the Demon King by sending their most powerful troops and adventurers, but no one succeeded and returned. The leaders are already at their wit��s end because their greatest warriors have been defeated. That is why I summoned you here, so that you can help Laotea and defeat the Demon King.��


    ��If that so, then why am I not being summoned by the kingdoms, why am I summoned by a petty ghost?��


    ��You know, it hurts me when you call me petty. Anyways, the kingdoms and their mages are simply not capable enough. They might be powerful but they lack knowledge about summoning. Even if they were to succeed, I doubt that they can return those that they summoned back to their respective worlds. I on the other hand is a capable ghost. The truth is, I died approximately a thousand years ago, back when magic is abundant and knowledge of it is still new. I studied about it and learned so many things, including this summoning.��


    ��So up till now, you still care for your land and continuous to observe them and help them? What a nice guy.��


    ��Stop, I��m flattered.��


    ��I��m just being sarcastic, you know.��


    ��*sigh* I thought so.��


    ��Anyways, my second concern is about the language of that world. Is it different from the language in here?��


    ��Ah, yes, yes. It is different form your world, but don��t worry, I will give you the power to understand and speak all the language in my world. You don��t have to worry about that, not at all.��


    ��Ok if you say so�� then lastly, I guess you wouldn��t send me there empty-handed right?��


    ��Are you perhaps talking about����


    ��Yes, that��s what I��m talking about.��


    ��Ahh. I have the power to give you any one ability or item that you want. Be it a legendary sword, a legendary shield, a lance, the power to travel instantaneously, everything, but only one of them.��


    ��So, you can give me anything?��


    ��Of course, if it is going to help you defeat the Demon Lord. I can grant you any one thing or ability that you want.��


    ��Then I would gladly accept it, anyways, I already have something in my mind.��


    ��Ohh, what is it.��


    ��I want to have the power of materializing imagination.��


    ������


    The voice seems to be confused on what I said.


    ��I guess you wouldn��t know about matter huh?��


    ��Yes. what is it, by the way?��


    ��The inhabitants of my world had a saying ��The only limit is your imagination��. I just have an idea that I could literally use my imagination and materialize it. The ability to create anything from thin air only by using my imagination, modify the appearance of an object and change its composition. Much like alchemy, but greater and much broader.��


    ��Ok if that��s what you want then����


    ��What is it, why the pause?��


    ��IT WAS A GODLY ABILITY TO BEGIN WITH!!!��


    ��If that��s what it is then, OK.��


    ��No, no, no. That is not OK! It��s like your saying that you want the power of creation itself!��


    ��It is not creation magic since everything I imagine is already existing.��


    ��Wait, you do know that you are from an another world, right? Then whatever you are imagining about is an entirely new thing if we were to base it in my world.��


    ��Hmm, you��ve got a point there. Even so, I still want that ability.��


    ��Wait, wait, wait. If I were to give them to you, I��m not sure if I will still exist afterwards. That requires a lot of mana. And when I say a lot, I really mean it.��


    ��You know, I am still pissed off about a certain someone that drags me in here unwillingly and let me suffer for three days while he is enjoying himself�� You would give it to me, right?��


    ��O-o-of course, I w-w-would give it to you. I really am sorry for complaining, please forgive me.��


    The voice sounded afraid and in the verge of crying.


    ��I didn��t specify someone you know?��


    ��Ok, ok, I will grant it, but there are limitations. First, you can��t create something that you haven��t seen before. Second, you the maximum limit that you can create simultaneously is two. And lastly, you won��t be able to use magic of my world. Those are your limitations.��


    ��I guess I can live with that.��


    ��And before I send you there, I just want to say something. Your world has a harsher environment than ours. Your world is your limitations when it comes to your physical capabilities. If you were to be transferred in my world, all those limitations are gone. To put it bluntly, you would be able to run faster, jump higher, survive a fall, and have more strength than the others from my world. You will be powerful there. Also, my world has level system, the more you work, the more level you gain. That is the measurement of strength and capability in my world. One of the limitations that comes with the ability I gave you is you would stay on level 1. It is not because you are broken. It is because the level reading mechanism in our world would not identify your ability, add to that the fact that you won��t be able to use the magic that exist in my world. Because of that, the readings will stay level 1. You will be treated badly because of your status.��


    ��I don��t care if I will be treated badly, I don��t care about their opinion. The only thing I want is to do my own thing.��


    The voice became silent for a while then a blue sphere surrounded me. The sphere appears to have some symbols in it that I don��t know.


    ��I guess, you didn��t need my warning after all. Ok then, prepare yourself, I will now going to send you to my world. Hold on! Wait, there is nothing to hold on, really. Anyways, prepare yourself Johannes. And one last warning. The Demon King is not the only enemy. Be observant, everyone will try to kill you if they know that you possess such abilities. Remember, the true enemy is not the one that attacks you in the frontline. It is the one that��s pulling the strings on a safe place. And also another thing, I don��t know where will you end up after this summoning. It is because I��ve used all my mana for your ability. I can guarantee your safety but I can��t guarantee your destination.��


    ��Wait wha-��


    Before I could finish what I��m saying, the blue sphere shined brightly that I had to cover my eyes because of it. After that, I felt the wind flowing in my face. As I opened my eyes, I saw a castle. The top of the castle to be exact and yes, I am falling right now. I panicked for a second but remembered that my survival when falling is guaranteed. Instead, I slowly look around me while I��m free-falling. I��ve lost my sense of direction in the air. As I look on the horizon, I saw greeneries everywhere. It looks like a province without any contamination from the city. The I looked at the back and I say the horizon opposite to the other side.


    ��So I guess that is the Dark Continent.��


    After observing my surrounding, I looked down and saw the top of the castle I saw earlier. As I go near the castle roofs, I had a chance to observe it more carefully. The castle feels ominous. It is surrounded by dark land and the castle itself appeared to be twisted.


    Now that I think about it, I don��t know which side I��m going to fall to, the Dark Continent or Laotea?


    Then as I carefully observe the castle, something comes up to me.


    ��Wait, am I perhaps going to fall to-��


    I fell face first.

 Chapter 3 – The Beginning of a Journey… Is right at the End?!

    ��Ow! What the heck was that. If I��m going to fall, at least prepare a soft landing for me. You good-for-nothing geezer. If you think I wouldn��t find you because you didn��t show your face, you are gravely mistaken. The next time I hear those voice, I will kill you even if you are already dead. Haaaa�� where am I, anyway? I think I landed somewhere in the Dark Continent Where am I�� Whoa! What an insanely huge room.��


    ��You there, who are you!��


    ��Wait, huh?��


    I observed my surroundings once again. It seems that I am currently in the throne room of the castle. There are several guards below the stairs leading to the throne. There are also a high-rank looking people in front of the throne, I think they are giving their respect to someone on the throne before I fell in here. There are also a group of soldiers in the back that is approaching me right now.


    ��Are you going to speak or we would just kill you right away?��


    The Man in an armor interrupted the Girl that��s speaking.


    ��This man is disrespectful in front of our King. Kill him.��


    The soldiers began to surround me while I��m still trying to recover.


    ��Die! You insolent fool��


    The man in armor looked in the distance while I��m being surrounded by the soldiers.


    ��Looks like I can put my new ability to a test. Now, let��s start with something really simple.��


    I began to imagine a weapon from my world. I once read about it in a book about modern war. The weapon has 6 rotating barrels and capable of high rate fire, a gun with destructive capability. One that can pulverize an enemy with its 6,000rpm rate of fire. Also known as a minigun.


    The soldiers began to panic when a black object instantaneously appeared in my hand, however, they are still not backing up.


    ��You know, I really want to use one of these. And now that I have the opportunity to do so, I will enjoy this to my heart��s content.��


    I pressed the trigger and the howl of the minigun echoed the area accompanied by the release of hot lead from its six-rotating muzzle. I turn around while the minigun releases it��s 6,000 rounds per minute mayhem.


    After a minute, what��s left to the soldiers are just sludge of green liquid. Looks like these soldiers are in a different race. The Man in the armor had its jaw dropped while the Girl who initially questioned me is now hiding in one of the pillars of the castle while trembling.


    ��What was that just now?! The soldiers are wiped out instantly, and you��re not even breaking a sweat. Who are you. Were you sent here by the pigs from the empire or the kingdom?��


    ��Kingdom? Empire? I don��t know about them. The only reason that I am here is because of the old-geezer that dropped me here without even specifying the direction in which I am going to fall to. On the first place, I don��t even know what is this place. If you are going to blame me because of what happened to your soldiers, I don��t care. Anyway, it is your group that showed hostility to me first, so I don��t see myself at fault in here.��


    ��Then who are you? To whom are you affiliated to? Did you rush through here for revenge? Money? Power? If so, we can give you more than what those who hire you can offer.��


    The man in the armor took a step forward while waiting for my answer.


    ��As I said, the fact that I am here is due to sheer luck. I was just randomly sent here without even knowing where I am going. Now that I think about it, you guys are assuming that I��m from the empire or the kingdom. As I recall, this world is under a war that the Demons started. If I could piece together everything I know up till now, I can conclude that this castle must be one of the Demon King��s General Fortress. So, I will guess that the one in the throne is one of his generals, am I right?��


    The Man in the Armor and the girl hiding in the pillar appears to be confused at what is happening and what I said just now.


    ��You really don��t know anything? Based on your attitude, it seems that you really don��t know anything. Well, that will not be a problem because you will die here anyways.��


    The man in the armor looked towards the huge door on the far side of the throne room.


    ��Generals of His Highness, the King, come forth! Destroy this insect who doesn��t even know our name and our greatness.��


    The man in the armor then pointed at me.


    ��You, ignorant fool. You will die here because of your foolishness. The only thing you could do is accept your destiny.��


    After he spoke, the Huge door opened and revealed 4 humanoid figures all wearing an armor. There is a giant humanoid beast holding a metal spike club, a humanoid with horn and holding a lance, a female with a ram horn holding a staff and a humanoid made of what appears to be hardened lava with cracks showing its bright orange liquid lava inside and is holding a flaming bow. Their appearance alone would make a normal human shriek in terror. Their sheer presence can literally kill a weak existence. But since I��m not normal, it doesn��t faze me at all.


    The Man in the mask then shouted: ��DIE!��


    The 4 Generals rush towards my position.


    ��Well, these might be a really good tutorial round for me. Well then, be my stepping stones!��


    I decompose the minigun that I��m holding and began thinking of a weapon that can be used for close quarter. One thing crossed my mind: A sword.


    I began to imagine a sword that has the sharpest blade out of all the other sword. A sword so sharp that it can cut through iron just like a butter. After imagining the components, I started imagining the design. A simple curved, single-edged sword with a gold-squared guard and a long grip with silk wrappings. The sword that appeared in my hand is a wakizashi, a shorter variation of katana with just 50cm of blade length.


    I examined the wakizashi and its blade.


    ��Just exactly how I imagined it to be. Man, this ability sure is convenient.��


    Meanwhile, the 4 Generals are still rushing towards my position. I don��t know why or how but I am able to sense their bloodlust, and it really is not a pleasant experience to be in the receiving ends of their bloodlust. Although unpleasant, it isn��t enough to make me falter.


    Not long after, the generals reached me and began their attack. The giant one swung his metal club to my position while the guy holding a lance is thrusting his lance towards me. The lava man(literally) with a bow was positioned far behind together with the woman with the staff, and it appears that the woman began chanting something that I think is a magic chant.


    At that moment, the whole place seems to move slowly. It seems that the moment I started focusing, I released the physical strength on par with how a normal people move fast on my old world. Looks like what the old geezer said about my physical strength being cut above the rest because of the harshness of my old world is true.


    I evaded the metal club swing and the lance thrust wit ease. I noticed that a flaming arrow is approaching me but since I am currently focused, the arrow��s movement appears to be slowed down so I was able to evade it easily. I continued evading their attacks like how you normally evade a ball that is thrown into you in my old world, it��s that easy. After a few attacks by the enemy, I noticed a huge ball of lightning heading towards me. Compared to the speed of the arrow, the huge ball of lightning is laughably slower. If I can reflect the ball of lightning, I would��ve done it. Since I am unable to use magic, I am unable to understand its concept therefore unable to reflect it back. That is why I just dodge it itself.Unauthorized content usage: if you discover this narrative on Amazon, report the violation.


    After some time, the 4 generals appear to be out of breath while I am far from being exhausted. I stood in front of them while my arms and legs akimbo.


    ��You���� the lancer said while catching his breath. ��What are you?��


    ��To be able to dodge continuously with us attacking, are you even a human?�� The giant said, also catching his breath.


    I looked at them with pity. It appears that these generals are, what do you call them�� weak.


    ��Hey! It��s rude doubting my humanity, especially when you, a fricking giant, said that to me. Anyways, is that all you can do? I expected a lot from all of you but it seems that my expectation for all of you are overestimated. I guess now is my time to counterattack, right?��


    ��Huh?�� they looked like they were confused by what I said, maybe because of their exhaustion, they couldn��t even grasp their current situation.


    I unsheathed the wakizashi and dash towards the giant. With a swing, I split the metal club in half. After that, I immediately went to its back and jump to its head then slash his head with my sword. It feels like cutting a butter in half, that��s how sharp the wakizashi that I made is. All of that happened in just a split second.


    ��And�� that��s one down!��


    The other 3 generals stood in their position without even noticing that one of their comrade has just been decapitated. It took them a couple of second before they grasped the situation.


    The staff-holding woman looked so shocked and afraid at the same time.


    ��Wha�� what did you do! Garga, he�� he was just standing there and then all of a sudden�� What did you do!��


    ��Oh, so that��s the guy��s name, not that it matters to me. Ok, on to the next one!��


    ��Wait����


    The lancer was about to say something but I immediately went in front of him and swing my sword, cutting the lance and the lancer in half. Green blood is now gushing all over the place.


    ��What a shame, he didn��t even last for a second there. Is this really all you��ve got?��


    The lava guy, having realized that two of his comrades are already dead, was burning in fury.


    ��You!!!��


    He then proceeds to aim his bow to me and then he pulled the string without putting an arrow, suddenly, a bright orange arrow appeared in place of the arrows. Of course, I wouldn��t let him shoot the arrow. I dashed towards the lava guy and slash him diagonally, separating the lower and upper body diagonally. It really is like cutting through a butter.


    The woman with staff took a few second before realizing that all of his comrades are dead. After she realized that she was the only one left, she immediately shouted in fear.


    ��WHAAAAAAAAAAAAA!!!��


    The look on her face is of genuine terror and fear for her life. She looks like she would beg for his life any second now.


    ��No, please, not me. I��ll do anything, I��ll be your slave. Just please don��t kill me. Please spare my life. I will follow you and will be obedient to you so please, don��t kill me, let me live. I beg you!��


    She was currently bowing down on me while bawling her eyes, she was really desperate to be spared by now.


    ��Come on, don��t just bow your head to someone, stand up. I admit, that was a really tempting offer.��


    She looked at me with eyes filled with newfound hope after I said that.


    ��Right! It was a really good offer! I will be your slave forever. You can do everything that you wish to do with me and when I say ��everything�� I mean it. I will be attending you every night if that��s what you want. Just don��t kill me.��


    She is now standing while looking at me with expectant eyes. She really wants to be spared no matter what.


    ��I would be glad to accept the offer����


    ��Really, then����


    Before she could even finish her sentence, I dashed in front of her and smiled.


    ��Eh?��


    The woman grasped the situation she is currently in. she looked like someone in the middle of celebrating but then suddenly received bad news. That is what her face looks like right now.


    ���� but, I don��t need someone to be my attendant. And the fact that your group attack first is irreversible. I��m sorry but I don��t think I��ll let you live.��


    ��Eh?��


    Looks like the woman is still trying to understand what I just said.


    ��Don��t worry, it will not be as gross as the first three.��


    After I said that, the girl, who barely know what��s currently happening, attempted to plea.


    ��Wait...��


    I stabbed the sword in her stomach. I hold her while she was leaning forward towards me and slowly dying. I then whispered something in her ear.


    ��Aren��t you glad I didn��t disembowel you like those 3 before you?��


    After that, I lay her body carefully in the floor. I then looked at the man in the armor while he was watching me slaughtering his generals in just a matter of seconds.


    ��Is that all? If so, then you��re just as boring as them. I��m bored now, I won��t be playing games with you anymore. Just die silently.��


    The man in the armor looks like a vein in his forehead is going to blow anytime soon. He was really red right now. I don��t know how mad you need to be to be able to become that color, I guess you really have to be really mad.


    ��I will kill you myself, you scoundrel! I will not show sympathy to you. I will kill you and throw you in a pack of Argio and I will let them eat you until you are just a bone!��


    ��Oho, really? I don��t care, I��m bored. Just Die.��


    The man in the armor rushed towards me. He was yelling what seems to be a battle cry, and a really unique one indeed.


    ��Diiiieeee!!!��


    *bang*


    A loud noise echoed across the room. After a few moments, the man in the armor fell face down then a pool of green blood puddled around his head.


    ��Oh, a headshot. Nice!��


    What I am holding right now is a metal weapon from my world. a gun wielded in one hand, a slightly long muzzle and a rotating 6-bullet cartridge. I had a revolver on my right hand while holding my wakizashi on the other.


    After that, the figure sitting on the throne stand up and head down towards me.


    ��You, human, what you showed me was impressive. You wiped out my generals in a matter of seconds, that is a great feat in itself but, unfortunately, you will die in here.��


    I looked at where he is and saw a bulky man towering me. I wasn��t afraid of him though, I don��t know why but it doesn��t make me feel afraid.


    ��Hey geezer, first of all, if what I did is impressive, then I guess that is why humans are losing their fight against all of you. Second, I doubt that you would be able to kill me, like really, you won��t be able to. And third, who are you anyway?��


    The man looked amused.


    ��So you don��t even know me, huh. Then I will introduce myself. I am the one that will bring the victory in our hands, I am the darkness itself. I am Troskaldt, the Demon King.��


    ��Ok, ok I don��t care. I��m just going to kill you anyways so�� that��s it.��


    After I said that, just then did I understand the true meaning of what the man said.


    ��Wait you are the Demon King? As in, the real Demon King?��


    ��Yes, I am the true heir of the demon territories, I am the Demon King Troskaldt��


    ��What the heck! I thought you were just one of the Demon Lord��s subordinates. I don��t even know that the Demon King is right here in front of me.��


    ��Are you now trembling because of fear, human?��


    ��Uhm�� not exactly. I just am happy to see you. I really am happy to see the one that I need to meet showed up so early in my journey in this world. You really save me a lot of time, Demon King!��


    I then proceeded to decompose all the weapon in my hand. After that, I declared my true intentions to the Demon King.


    ��Now, if you didn��t mind, please die for me.��


    The Demon King just smirked.


    ��Come to me, young challenger!��


    Well, this seems to be a good time to test the range of effectiveness of my ability. I imagined an ice wall and summon it on the farthest that it can go. Looks like the range of effectiveness is are more or less 10 meters.


    As expected to the Demon King, he easily dodged it.


    ��Is that all you got kid? It seems like you��re just weak after all.��


    I smirked at the Demon King.


    ��You know, Troskaldt was it? I tried the wall just to test its range. Don��t get full of yourself just for dodging that wall which is not even lethal to say the least. Also, I got you were I want you right now. Since you��re the Demon King, I want to be considerate and give you a wholesome fight before killing you. But because you provoked me, I lost all the interest of giving you a wholesome fight. You know what? Since I am bored, I��m going to defeat you in the most anticlimactic way possible. A death that will be so lame that you will be ashamed by it even if you��re already dead.��


    I can see few veins in the Demon King��s forehead. Looks like I made him mad.


    ��Hey child. I don��t like people who are all barks and no bite. If you can kill me in that manner, then show me. If you can kill me, that is.��


    I just brushed of his comments because it��s not important to me.


    ��You see Demon King����


    I stretched my hand like I was grasping for something. After I imagined what I need to grasp I opened my palm and I smiled once again.


    ����I��ve done it already.��


    I closed my palm and grip it hard. At the same time, the Demon King began holding into his chest, while staggering and trying to breathe.


    ��Wh-wha-what did you do?!��


    ��Just what you asked me to do, I killed you in the lamest way possible. I crushed your heart, literally.��


    The Demon King can barely stand or speak, it seems it would just take a few more seconds before he dies.


    ��Curse you!�� says the Demon King before falling into eternal slumber.


    After I confirmed that the Demon King is dead, I surveyed the surrounding for any back-ups. Looks like there��ll be no more maggots to pester me.


    ��Well, that was easy. Looks like I just defeated the final boss in my first hour in this world. I wonder if there��s an artifact here that can help me return to my world.��


    I stand up and head towards the huge door to search for the said artifact, but before I can reach the huge door, I felt a presence rapidly heading towards me. As I turn to look around, I saw the girl who was hiding in the pillars of the room earlier. And she was midair while attempting to strike me with a knife.

 Chapter 4 – Let the Adventure begins… For real!

    ��Oh, you��re awake. Have you calmed yourself down? If yes then why don��t you introduce yourself to me?��


    I was talking to a girl who is currently restrained in a chair by handcuffs. This girl is responsible for attacking me a while ago. This is what happened:


    <hr>


    I stand up and head towards the huge door to search for the said artifact, but before I can reach the huge door, I felt a presence rapidly heading towards me. As I turn to look around, I saw the girl who was hiding in the pillars of the room earlier. And she was midair while attempting to strike me with a knife. Her movement might be agile, but I am faster than her and therefore, I evaded the knife. I looked at her face and saw the fire in her eyes, looks like he was really angry and wants to have revenge so badly.


    ��Oh, now that I think about it, you are the Girl that talked to me first after I fell in this castle, right? So? Why are you suddenly attacking me?��


    The Girl looked at me with the eyes full of anger and hatred.


    ��You��re really asking me why? You��ve just killed all of my comrade! You��ve killed my King! Is that not enough reason to make me want to kill you?!��


    I observed the girl carefully. I can��t really see what she was wearing underneath because she has a robe with hood around her. She looks like a certain character that wields a sword made of light. Her robe is dark red colored and you can just barely see her face underneath the hood. She was holding what looks like a ceremonial knife with gold hilt and engraved with different symbols. The blade is curved in an S-shaped manner. She was different to the first Generals that I fought a while ago because she looks more�� human. She has a skin that sits perfectly between being porcelain-white and slightly-tanned brown. She has the same features as humans. In short, you will definitely mistake her for a human.


    ��Tell me, are you one of the Demon King��s General?��


    She doesn��t lower her guard at all. She glared at me while answering my questions.


    ��Yes, I am one of his Generals. You��ve got problem with that?��


    ��Well, you see, apart from the first 5 generals, you look more human than them.��


    The Girl had a confused and shocked reaction in her face. Looks like my question is just fitting to ask of her.


    The girl then realized the question that I asked her then she started removing the hood from his head. What showed up under the hood is a pair of sheep-like horns.


    ��You are not entirely wrong. I am what others call, a half-bred. I was born from a human mother and a Demon Father. Because of that, we were extremely persecuted. Because of my my appearance, we were avoided by humans, my mother couldn��t even find a proper job because of that. One night, while we were sleeping deep in the forest, we were attacked by humans who wants me dead because they said that I am the bringer of bad luck to the humans. I escaped them but only because my mother sacrificed herself to buy some time for my escape. I will never forgive humans until I die!��


    The Girl appeared teary eyed for a second but then immediately wiped her tears and return her deadly gaze towards me.


    ��Um, I don��t know what to say to that. Umm�� Well�� I kinda want to apologize to you because of that�� Not that it��s my fault, I just felt the need to.��


    ��It��s too late for that, human. I will kill you right here. After that, I would follow my comrades to the afterlife.��


    ��Look, girl�� I get it that you hate humans, but I don��t think that I am the right person to receive your hatred. Heck, I��m not even a part of any races that existed. Yes, I look like a human, but I really am not, in any ways, related to the kingdom or empire that you said.��


    The stares of the girl became heavy, it might even be able to kill someone.


    ��LIES! You just want to be spared, you lowly humans. I will never forgive humans, I will never forgive your kin, I will never forgive you!��


    She gave me a look of pure hatred. Looks like I won��t be able to avoid fighting this one.


    ��What I said is the only truth. I don��t care if you believe me or not, I just want to avoid fighting in this kind of situation. I hope you are intelligent enough to assess the situation you are in right now. I don��t think that you want to end up like one of your comrades, right?��


    The moment I finished talking, the girl dashed straight on to me. A normal human would��ve probably had their head split into two by that time, but since I am not a normal human of this world, I was able to detect her motions even at her speed and predict her point of contact, that is why I managed to dodge her.


    ��It��s rude to attack someone in the middle of their speech, you know. That��s just plain rude.��


    The girl turned her head towards the direction I��m standing. the girl readies herself for another dash but before she could do it, I dashed in front of her and hit her in the back of her head with a hand chop. I controlled the power I exerted to just make her unconscious and not to deliver a fatal blow.


    The girl fell face down on the floor. I found a chair inside the throne room and restrained the girl in the chair with handcuffs that I created from my ability. That is what led me to the situation I am right now.


    <hr>


    After observing the situation, the girl began to struggle to release herself in her restraints. When she became exhausted, she glared at me.


    ��Hey, release me!��


    ��Nope, I won��t release you. Not until you answer my question. Now, let��s get back to the topic at hand. What is your name?��


    The girl, having realized that she can��t escape if she doesn��t cooperate, sighed and averted her gaze.


    ��Erylla Erfreth, That��s my name. Can you release me now?��


    ��No, not yet. Not until you stop attacking me.��


    ��Huh?! That won��t happen. As soon as I escaped through these restraints, I will slit your throat.��


    It��s no good reasoning to this girl without revealing who I really am.


    ��Ok then, I am going to introduce myself to you, after that, I will free you.��


    ��Don��t bother, I don��t care about human anyways.��


    ��Well, as you can see, I am not really a normal human.��


    Erylla had a puzzled look on her face.


    ��What do you mean?��


    ��I wasn��t even an inhabitant of this world, I was summoned here from another world. The name of my world is Earth.��


    ��Earth? That sounds lame. That sounded like a made-up place of sort. You��re not going to fool me with that.��


    ��My ability is not under magic category. It is given to me by the old geezer��s ghost when I was summoned here. My physical strength is far greater than other normal being in this world because the world that I lived before was a lot harsher than this one. The moment I was sent into this world, I was removed from the restrictions of my own world, therefore, amplifying my physical strength. The weapons that you saw when I fought with the generals are also a weapon from my old world. Are you satisfied now?��


    Despite looking a little bit confused, Erylla was still able to process all that information.


    ��Your story is kind of fishy, in the end, what is the true nature of your ability?��


    ��I��m not going to tell you, not yet. Not until I determined that you befit my trust.��


    ��I understand. Still, you don��t think that you will be able to gain my trust with just that, right.��


    ��Look, Erylla, I don��t know what I could do for you to trust me, but one thing��s for sure. I am not like those humans that killed your mother. In fact, if I had a chance to meet them, I will decapitate them in the most excruciating way possible. I know that it��s hard for you to trust a human especially with those past of yours. But please, I want you to bet on me just this one and I promise you that you will get your revenge with the one that killed your mother.��


    Erylla��s reaction seemed softer than before. She looked like she was carefully thinking what should she reply.


    Silence once again enveloped the room.


    ���� Ok, I��ll trust you. It doesn��t mean that I fully trust you yet. If you dare double-cross me, I will not hesitate to end you.��


    ��Actually, what you say was actually the most reasonable and comfortable choice for this situation. I just need to make sure not to deceive you, right? I got it.��


    ��As long you understand. Now, would you mind releasing me right now?��


    I decomposed the handcuffs in her hands and feet. After that, she looked at me with doubtful eyes. Looks like she still doesn��t know what to do with me.


    What follows is a long silent. I was sitting in a stair step while she��s cross-legged sitting in front of me. She��s carefully observing me for a while now. After a few moments, she stood up and head towards me.


    ��I still don��t know if what you said is true. But I decided to trust you on that note. And since you��ve defeated the Demon King, I don��t have the reason to stay here by myself. So, I decided to accompany you to your journey. I might not look like one but I am a bonafide assassin with huge skillset. You can make full use of me on any kinds of killing and reconnaissance duties.��


    ��Um, I��d rather avoid the killing part.��


    ��So be it. Anyways, Nice to meet you�� Um����


    ��Oh, I forgot about it. My name��s Johannes. Just Hans is fine since were comrades now.��


    ��Ok Hans, you can call me Eri if you want.��


    ��Nice to be of your acquaintance, Eri. I hope we both get along.��


    I shook her hands. Looks like they don��t have the ��handshake�� customs in here because she appeared confuse as I did that.


    ��Oh, I��m sorry. It��s just one of my own world��s customs.��


    ��Don��t�� worry about it�� what should we do now?��


    Now that I think about it, I literally have nothing to do now that I defeated the Demon King. This is the moment where a happy ever after should occur, right? Honestly, I was expecting a huge ��Game Over�� sign to float above the Demon King��s corpse. But I guess that would just be weird if that happened. But the fact that I have nothing to do is still lingers.


    ��Um, Eri. Honestly, I have literally no plans after defeating the Demon Lord. I mean, defeating him should be the final mission of a hero, right? What am I supposed to do now that I defeated the Demon King in my first day in this world?��


    ��How should I know!��


    ��Figures�� Well, let��s just do what we can do!��


    Eri then looked at me with sharp gaze.


    ��And����


    ��Yes, yes. We will also find those humans responsible for your mother��s death, I won��t forget it.��


    She then showed a little smile at me.


    ��Good!��


    If we were to go on a journey, we would need money. I have nothing when I was thrown in this world. I can create money using my ability but I don��t know what the money in this world looks like.


    ��Um, Eri. Is there a treasure room in here? You know, the loots that was gathered by the Demon King from his invasion?��


    ��I shouldn��t be doing this, being a former general and all. But since the Demon King is dead, I guess I can do anything now. Yes, there��s a treasure room in here. It is located at the door on the back of the throne.��Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators!


    ��I guess I��ll get all of the accumulated treasures of the Demon King first. After that, we can immediately start our journey.��


    We went to the treasure room and what we saw is, as expected, a mountain of gold silver and bronze. Not only that but there are also all kinds of weapons that I think are all rare or even legendary weapons, if not then why would he hide it in his treasure room.


    ��Wow, this really is a lot even for a Demon King��s standard.��


    ��He was just a hoarder, that��s all. The Demon King always remind us to gather every treasure we can get and every gold and silver in the area that we will attack. No wonder there are so many artifacts and golds and silvers in here. By the way, If you want, we can get a few gold and weapons and then make this castle your own treasure home.��


    ��I don��t think that it would be a good idea. I bet as of now, the human forces are advancing through your army��s defenses. Add to it that the Demon King has been slayed, the Demon forces must��ve been under chaos right now. If we were to leave the treasures here, they will be hoarded by humans.��


    ��We shouldn��t let that happen, no matter what!��


    ��Of course, we will not let it happen. That��s why we will make sure not to left even a single coin.��


    ��But, how��re you going to do that. Even if you��re powerful, you can��t possibly carry all of these, that��s impossible.��


    ��I think I can do it, but I don��t know what item to manifest that can hold all of the treasures.��


    After I said that, I noticed something on the far corner of the treasure room. There is something that appears to be a small bag made of gold. I approached the bag while Eri followed me with her eyes.


    I picked up the Golden Bag and carefully examine it. The bag looks nothing out of ordinary except for being gold.


    ��If this is in the treasure room, then it must��ve been because it is gold or�� if my guess is correct����


    I picked a sword near me and try to put it inside the bag that is smaller than the sword itself. The sword goes inside while I��m thrusting until all of it was inside (I didn��t mean this statement to be as lewd as what it came to be. Sorry.). My guess turns out to be correct.


    ��As expected of a magic world, they do have this kind of item in here after all.��


    Eri approached me from behind and looked at the bag I was holding.


    ��So, what��s with that bag?��


    ��You don��t know this? I thought this would be a common knowledge in this world.��


    ��No Idea.��


    ��Well, This bag that I��m holding right now is imbued with spatial magic, if that��s what it was called in this world. Basically, the bag can hold a lot more than what its outside appearance looks like and the weight will not even change. In short, we can store all of the treasures in here without even increasing our travel load.��


    ��That would be really helpful. But will it hold out if we were to dump all the treasures there?��


    ��Just worry about it when it happens. For now, help me put all the treasures in the bag.��


    As soon as we finished confirming that the bag does work, we started putting the treasures in the bag.


    After a few moments, Eri approached me. She was holding two sheathed daggers.


    ��Hans, do you have a second?��


    ��Yup, what is it?��


    ��I would like to keep these daggers for myself. Since I have no weapon, it would be nice if I can get these.��


    The dagger in question is a jet-black colored one with cracks that is filled with glowing pink gemstone. The crack must��ve been inflicted purposely so that the cracks can be filled with the pink gemstone. The hilt wasn��t extravagant at all, just hastily wrapped with silk that appears to be aged as well. It wasn��t very long, just under a quarter of a meter. The overall look wasn��t that imposing.


    ��That��s fine. But why do you want to keep those two, there are literally other weapons in here that looks strong and pleasing to the eyes in here.��


    ��You really don��t know anything, huh? These daggers might be looking inferior than the other weapon here, but it certainly is one of the strongest. The Blade itself was forged using an obsidian block from Mount Harlequin, and the Pink-glowing gemstones that was imbued in the cracks are Ioris Crystal. The combination of the two materials are the reason why the daggers are so powerful.��


    ��Okay? You��ve lost me halfway. Mount Harlequin? Ioris Crystal? The Former sounds like a a jester��s name and the latter sounds like a name of a person from a certain fighting game.��


    While we are putting the treasures in the bag, Eri tells me about Mount Harlequin and Ioris Crystal


    ��Mount Harlequin, also known as The Sacred Volcano of the North, is a Volcano that has been active since time immemorial. The volcano last erupted about a hundred years ago. The volcano is deemed sacred because, unlike other volcano, this one releases pure white lava. The eruption from a hundred years ago were the most beautiful one that everyone will see in their lifetime. The color of the obsidian formed inside the volcano were dark blue, unlike other volcanoes that produces normal black obsidian. But there are times that the Obsidian from the Mount Harlequin was devoid of any impurities, making it the purest obsidians. Purest Obsidians, unlike the normal dark blue obsidians from the same volcano, Were pure black. Much more darker than the normal obsidians found in normal volcanoes. The Pure Obsidians are very durable, yet easy to work with. These Pure Obsidians were so rare that the obsidian block itself costs thousands of gold coins depending on the quality and quantity. Pure obsidian can also be sharpened until it can cut even a rock with ease.��


    ��I didn��t know, that it was that important. Better keep a note to myself whenever I found one.��


    ��That is not the only thing that makes the dagger powerful. The Ioris Crystal is also one of its components. Ioris Crystal can store mana. The more mana you store, the stronger it becomes. Although not as rare as the Pure Obsidians, It can certainly be on par with the Pure Obsidian in terms of power. Ioris Crystal is used to make staffs and wands for mages because of their mana storing properties. Normally, you wouldn��t even think of using one if you weren��t a mage but if it��s imbued within the cracks of the dagger, then it was perfect. The durability and sharpness of the Pure Obsidian together with Ioris Crystal fragments is a wonderful combination. You can pour a lot of mana in the Ioris Crystal so that every strike will guarantee a fatal blow not only because the blow will be stronger but also because it can cause mana poisoning to the ones in the receiving end. A perfect weapon for an Assassin.��


    ��Mana Poisoning?��


    ��Ah, yes. Mana Poisoning. Don��t tell me you don��t it too.��


    ��Yes, I don��t know it.��


    ��Well, Mana Poisoning happens when a huge amount of mana were to be injected into a person��s body. There is usually a limit on how much mana can your body store, if it exceeded the limit, it would become really bad for your health, especially on your innards. You can stop mana poisoning from spreading if you were to release it naturally, but if I were to use this dagger with a huge amount of mana stored in it, a single hit would inject large amount of mana, therefore, making the mana flow abnormal and because of its sudden injection, it will definitely kill anyone.��


    ��That was scary!��


    ��I know right, and it sure is effective.��


    How much killing do you need to be like this girl? Probably a lot more than what I��m thinking.


    The time really does feels faster when you��re talking to someone. We��ve already finished gathering all the treasures without even noticing it. There is not even a single coin left. Eri really wants to leave nothing for the human forces. The humans will surely be disappointed upon coming here. Not only did the Demon King already defeated, but also his treasures were already hoarded. I can just imagine their faces when they discover all of that. Which reminds me��


    ��Eri, can you fetch the empty treasure box right there?��


    ��Okay, but what would you do with it?��


    ��Ah, just a little surprise for the human forces when they reach this place.��


    I placed the treasure box in the middle of the throne room together with the corpse of the Demon King. I then use my imagine ability to produce a piece of paper and pen. Afterwards, I gave the paper and the pen to Erylla. Erylla was confused at first given that I suddenly gave her something that she doesn��t know the purpose of.


    ��Eri, do you know how to write in human language?��


    ��Yes, we generals needed to learn our opponent��s language to be able to communicate them with ease. Why?��


    ��I want you to write something for me.��


    ��Write, using this stick?��


    Eri was holding the pen without knowing what it does.


    ��Yes, yes. That is a writing tool. Now, I want you to write this: I hate to break it to you but you are late. I��ve already defeated the Demon King. Also, if you want his treasures, too bad. I already have all of them. You can do anything you want with the castle, I don��t really care about it. That��s all, have a nice trip back home! ��


    Eri, even though she��s still new in using the pen, wrote what I just said, and it was well done for someone who hasn��t used a pen.


    ��Is this good enough?��


    ��Yeah, it��s really good.��


    I get the Paper from Eri and I placed it inside the treasure box.


    ��Now, they will know what happened, at the same time, be really pissed. This is so amusing!��


    Eri, still holding the pen I gave her, approached me.


    ��Are you done with your business here? If so, I��d like to ask you to accompany me.��


    ��Where to?��


    ��Don��t worry, it��s just inside the castle grounds.��


    ��Ok, lead the way.��


    I picked the magic bag on the ground and followed Erylla. We walk past a couple of chambers and reached a stair that heads towards what it seems to be a dark basement. I used my imagine ability to create a flashlight. Eri was startled at first but then after I explained to her what it was, she calmed herself down and proceeded down below.


    The place that we reached is a pitch-black chamber the size of a normal storage room. The room was filled with silence. The smell was unbearable, it would definitely make you puke because of the filthy smell and the overall environment.


    ��What��s this place? This really looks ominous.��


    ��Don��t worry, I��m just here to finish my other business.��


    ��Business?��


    Suddenly, I felt someone grabbed my feet.


    ��Wha-!��


    I was shocked at first but then when I point the flashlight on where I felt the grab, I saw a hand full of cuts and scrapes. I trace the whereabouts of the hand and saw a humanlike figure.


    Not just a humanlike figure, but a bonafied human.


    I don��t know what to feel. The human, which appears to be a little girl, was full of scratches, cuts, and bruises in her body. Various feelings clouded my heart. I used my imagine ability to create a battery-powered light bulb on the ceiling of the room. As my eyes adjust to brightness, an atrocious scene filled my eyes.


    The room is full of humans, mainly women and children, and with the same condition as the little girl who grabbed my feet. I looked, at the little girl who was still holding on to my feet. Our eyes met and her mouth began to open slowly.


    ��P-please�� Help u-us����


    An unpleasant feeling filled my heart, I don��t know what is it, but it really is something powerful. I approached Erylla with a blank look.


    ��Erylla, what are you going to do with them.��


    ��I��ll kill them all to so that when the human forces arrived, this scene will unravel to them. In that way, I can damage their morale.��


    The whole room, now that the prisoners are aware of our existence, began to be noisy. All sounds of cries for help can be heard in the room.


    ��Help us!��


    ��Please, spare us!��


    ��Please, just spare my son, I beg you.��


    Those are some of the cries that can be heard across the room.


    I went in front of Erylla.


    ��Release them����


    ��What did you just say?��


    ��Release them����


    ��No! why would I, this is my chance to get even to those filthy humans. I can let them experience how to lose someone that they loved the most.��


    ��I said, release them����


    ��And what will you do if I don��t? ha! You��re just a spineless bastard just as I thought.��


    At that moment, Darkness filled my heart, my thoughts became clouded, the overwhelming feeling I had before was reaching its limit and is going to burst out. Ah, so this is Anger.


    In a split second, I produced the sharpest sword that I can imagine without focusing on what it will look like. I swung the sword in a surprising speed and stopped near Erylla��s throat.


    ��I will kill you����


    Without even a second to react, Erylla was flabbergasted.


    ��I-I-I��m sorry! Please spare me!��


    The voice she released were cracked and filled with terror.


    At the same time, I was snapped out of my dark-consuming anger and once again regained composure. When I looked at her face, I can only see pure terror in her expression. The looks of someone who suddenly faced with the God of Death. That is what Erylla��s face looked like, A face drained with blood. The dagger she was holding before has been dropped on the ground. In short, she looks like someone who��ve seen a monster.


    I pulled away from her. After that, Eri lost strength in her feet and staggered down. She was breathing heavily, as if she just barely escaped the grasp of Death itself.


    I looked at the weapon I��m holding and saw something really terrifying. The sword was misshapen yet really sharp. The sword looks like the Purest of Black with what appears to be a design that looks like splattered blood all over the sword. There wasn��t even a normal hilt, just a metal wrapped in an aged leather.


    I immediately dropped the weapon I��m holding which then disappears into thin air.


    I realized what happened then. I released a pure uncontrollable bloodlust. It is because when I looked on the other prisoners, they also looked like they saw a monster that can kill them instantly.


    ��I-I��m sorry, I didn��t mean to do that.��


    Even after I apologized, Eri��s still distance herself to me and didn��t utter a single word.


    I approached the fearful prisoners and proceeded to remove their restraints one by one until all of them are free from restraints. I then head in front of them.


    ��First of all, I want to say that the War between Humans and Demons have been ended. That��s why all of you are now free. But I want you to promise something to me first. Since the Human alliance doesn��t know that the Demon King has already been slayed, I want you to keep quiet about his defeat and don��t ever speak of this moment to other humans. I want you all to keep these a secret. That��s all I want. Now, you��re all free to go, head to your families and friends, celebrate, but never forget about our promise. Understood?��


    Although still confused about what��s happening, they let out a pretty loud reply.


    ������Yes!������


    ��Good, now, you can freely go. Enjoy your life!��


    The Prisoners then ran towards the basement exit while cheering, a while after, the cheers began to fade and Erylla and I were the only once left on a room full of silence.


    Unable to bear the silence, I approached Eri and sat in front of her. I looked her in the eye and began to apologize once again.


    ��Eri, I��m really sorry about what happened, I didn��t mean it, it��s just that�� I was drowned in anger on seeing you kill those innocent people.��


    Eri was still silent, she also averted her gaze from me.


    ��I did that unconsciously because I really don��t want you to end up killing those that are innocent and unarmed. I really am sorry. I know you wanted to get revenge to humans but I think you wouldn��t be satisfied if you were to kill them all. Their deaths will be pointless if you kill them out of revenge. Save those anger and bloodlust to when you met the people that killed your mother.��


    Eri slowly lifted her head and looked at me. She then opened her mouth.


    ��You know what, that is the first time I felt genuine terror. I thought that the Demon King was fearsome enough, but then you came. That was the first time I thought that I don��t want to die. Dying in your hands while in you��re like that was like I am going to be eaten alive.��


    ��Look, I��m really sorry.��


    ��You don��t need to. In fact, I was glad that I��m together with a person like you. I can be at ease if I knew that someone that fearsome is together in my travel. I feel like our travels will be filled with amusements.��


    ��Is that right?��


    ��Well, I also need to make sure not to be on your wrong side. I don��t want to experience that thing again.��


    ��Don��t worry, I won��t be doing that again. Unless someone forces me to. But I guess there are no existence that can push me to that limit in this world, right?��


    ��Okay, If you say so.��


    I helped her stand up and we went towards the stairs leading to the hallway. As we reach the hallway, there are already no signs of the prisoners that I freed few minutes ago.


    ��I guess we can now properly start our journey. This��ll be fun.��


    ��I think so too.��


    We walked in the long hallway that leads to the outside of the castle.


    Now that I look at this, this castle sure is deserted. No other personnel can be seen inside the castle. Looks like they are not prepared for a surprise attack by me. Well, it��s their fault so, I don��t care.


    ��Hey Eri, is this castle always deserted?��


    ��Yes. Only us generals, some of our forces and the Demon King itself.��


    ��This place is depressing. Let��s get out of here quickly.��


    We gathered all we can get and got ready to embark on this journey with Eri. At least I��m not going to be alone while travelling.


    ��Wait, before I forgot����


    I hold the golden bag and used my imagine ability to change the appearance of the Golden Bag. After I used my ability, the bag��s appearance became a blander and the golden bag became a small tattered messenger bag with faded color of fabric.


    ��Why��d you do that?��


    ��This is just a countermeasure for thief. It is so they wouldn��t even think of stealing the bag. Tell me, if you were the thief, would you think of stealing this bag?��


    ��No, that looks old and tattered.��


    ��That��s my point!��


    ��Ah, now I get it.��


    After preparing, we went to the front gate and then we start our journey without any plans at all.


    ��Let��s go!��


    ��Ok!��

 Chapter 5 – Forging Connections… And A Certain Demon’s Killing Intent

    <h1></h1>


    It��s been three days since we started our journey without even a fixed destination. As you know, we��re currently in Balros, also called Dark Continent. In order to discover more of this world, we decided to travel across the other continent. Because of that, we decided to go to Laotea, the largest continent in Veneofel, and in order to do that, we need to reach the closest port to it, which is located at the Port Town of Oreius.


    We spend our last few days travelling and sometimes defeating monsters and collecting some of their parts like their hide, stingers, eyes, ears etc. We are doing this because Eri said that we can exchange the things we collected for money when we reach the city.


    Back to present, we currently are sitting in a caf�� inside Oreius. We��ve just arrived in this city, so right now, we��re just going to eat and go sightsee a bit then head towards the trading market.


    The Town of Oreius looks like a typical town from Tudor Period of England, an old period from my old world. The town��s aesthetics makes me feel nostalgic since the town really looks like the one from my old world. Not that I��ve been there first hand, I just happen to read a book about old England in the local library.


    We are sitting in the table near the window while drinking Ilhof, a drink similar to coffee in my old world but much less bitter. It tasted like a really tame coffee. Apparently, you can add sweeteners of any kind. This caf�� sure is interesting. Eri looks like she��s enjoying her drink too. Despite being a Demon King General, she sure does look like she loves Ilhof which is a Human Beverage.


    ��Eri, say�� have you ever drank Ilhof before?��


    ��No, not that I think of.��


    ��Even though you��re a general?��


    ��I��ve never had a chance to just sit by leisurely in the castle when I was a general, and besides, we don��t have someone that can prepare this drink. It��s true that I hate humans, but this does put a smile on my face.��


    ��Oho�� for a demon to say something like that�� this drink sure is amazing.��


    ��I��m technically still half-human, by the way.��


    ��Oh, sorry, I forgot.��


    After that, we indulge ourselves in this wonderful drink and the beautiful scene of the sea on the horizon. This town sure is bustling with cheerfulness even though the world is currently under conflict between humans and demons.


    After finishing our drinks, we discuss about our next step.


    ��Now, what should we do next?��


    ��First thing��s first. We need to sell all the monster parts that we collected. I would rather not touch the Demon King��s treasure yet. We also need to know what form of currency are they using in this town. If we were to just pull out some gold coins and it turns out that the coins were not even circulated in Laotea, we��re definitely be the target of different people with different objectives.��


    ��That makes sense. We wouldn��t want to gather all kinds of attention for us.��


    ��On that note, Eri, do you know where can we sell these?��


    ��Why��re you asking me? It��s also my first time in this town. I��m a general, did you forget about that? I only went to different towns just to invade it for the Demon King.��


    ��So, we��re both ignorant, huh? Might as well just ask someone in this town.��


    ��Yup, let��s do that.��


    After being done with our drinks, we went to the counter and ask the personnel on the counter. The one in the counter is a female Beastmen who looks like in her thirties. She��s wearing a maid uniform that resembles those old French Maid Uniforms.


    ��Um, can we ask something?��


    ��Sure, what is it?��


    ��What store will we be able to exchange monster parts?��


    ��There��s no store that can do that in here, only the adventurer��s guild can exchange money for those.��


    ��Ok, so�� where can we find the adventurer��s guild?��


    ��the adventurer��s guild is located in front of the central plaza. You will be able to notice the guild right away because it has the largest building in that vicinity, also because many people come and go every time�� and also because of the huge-ass banner in the front.��


    ��Thank you, we��ll come again later.��


    ��Well then, have a nice day, you two.��


    After that, we went to the adventurer��s guild.


    <hr>


    ��Yup, this is definitely huge for a guild building.��


    ��You think so too, Eri?��


    ��Yup, this is huge, no matter how you see it.��


    ��Have you been in a guild before?��


    ��Yes, when I was really young. And the guild that I went looks just like a normal house.��


    ��Hmm�� They sure spent a lot of money in here.��


    ��What a pointless way to spend money.��


    Right now, we are in front of a needlessly huge infrastructure that they call guild building. They really splurge hard cash in this, and really, for what purpose?


    ��They must��ve a reason or two about why they made the guild needlessly huge.��


    ��I doubt that it��ll be reasonable enough.��


    ��Let��s just go inside.��


    We went inside the adventurer��s guild. As expected, the interior is needlessly huge. It must be as big as a church hall. The Guild had tables all over the floor and a bar on the side, looks like this is where adventurer��s gets rowdy. At the opposite side of the room, there��s the counter for the adventurer��s guild.


    I take out the sack of monster drops from the bag. I did it outside so that no one will create a ruckus about a magic item.


    As soon as we enter the premise, the adventurer��s inside lock their gazes towards us.


    ��Looks like we aren��t entirely welcome in here, huh.��


    ��They certainly look like hostile.��


    ��Meh, let��s just finish our business in here and get going.��


    ��I agree.��


    We went straight towards the counter while the adventurer��s gazes are following us. As soon as we reach the counter, we were greeted by a girl that looks like an adventurer too. A tanned skin with bob hair and a scabbard and a knife wrapped around her waist.


    ��Good Morning Fellas, what brought you here?��


    Even her accent is manly, adventurer-like.


    ��Um, were hear to exchange some of the monster parts that we collected along the way for money.��


    ��Sure, what��re you going to exchange?��


    ��All of these.��


    I put the sack that I��m carrying on the counter. It made a loud *thud* when I drop it. When the girl tried to lift the sack, it appears that she couldn��t even lift it.


    ��Whoa! What the heck! How can you even lift this?��


    ��Huh? It��s not that heavy, right Eri?��


    Eri picked up the sack with ease.


    ��Not even heavy.��


    ��That��s what I��m saying.��


    The Girl had a shocked expression on her face, but immediately changed to a smiling one. Looks like she��s professional enough to not let her emotion show, not for a long time, at least.


    ��First things first, can you help me bring this on the Weighing Stone?��


    ��Weighing Stone?��


    ��You know, the thing we use to measure the weight of an object.��


    ��Oh, this is the first time I heard about it, that��s convenient.��


    ��It was staple to every merchant to have one, that should��ve been common knowledge. What��s with the two you, weird.��


    ��No point in prolonging this subject any further. I��ll just help you bring that to the weighting stone.��


    We went across the counter and on the side, there was a stone slab that looks like granite. I put down the sack their and suddenly, numbers are shown holographically. Looks like the stone is imbued by magic that determines the weight of anything put on top of it.


    ��WHAT! 50 Kigar?! That��s why I can��t even lift the damn sack. How strong are you two, really?��


    Gar is the basis of the weight measurement in here, it means gram. Kigar basically means Kilogram in this world. Looks like the knowledge that the old geezer gave me really isn��t for naught?


    ��Really? I thought it was just a couple of gar because it wasn��t heavy at all.��


    ��No, no, no. You two are just strong, really strong.��


    ��*sigh* let��s just get over with this, can you tell me how much will we be getting from all of these?��


    ��Well, the sack that you brought in here is so heavy, the parts collected were from entry level to medium level monsters and they are still in pristine shape. I can give you a hundred Gold coins and twenty Silver Coins for all of that.��


    I don��t know how to react since I really don��t know the value of the currency they have in here. That��s why I decided to further question the Counter Girl.


    ��We��re not from this are so we don��t know the value of the currencies in here. Can you explain to us how much does the coins cost?��


    ��You��re not familiar with the currency, even though this is the only currency that is being circulated in the whole continent? You two are really weird.��


    ��We��re really sorry for the inconvenience.��


    ��Ok then, let me explain it to the both of you. Bronze is the coin with the lowest value compared to other coins. You can��t even buy a proper food with just a single bronze coin. Silver coins, on the other hand, is much more valuable than bronze ones. A Single Silver Coin is Equivalent to a hundred Bronze Coins. With that, you can have a proper lodging for a day, food not included. Gold, however, is the one with the highest value compared to others. A Single Gold Coin is equal to a hundred Silver Coins. With that, you can afford the most expensive lodging with food for a couple of days, that��s all for a single Gold Coin.��


    ��So, you��re saying that we��re rich, like, real rich right now?��


    ��Yes, you are.��


    ��But why is the whole sack equivalent to a hundred Gold and twenty Silver?��


    ��Well, all the monster parts you collected were in demand right now. Some of them are used for medicinal purpose, some is for concocting poisons and status-damaging potions. Because of the market of these products, the resources are really in need. That��s why the fifty kigar of monster parts you brought are really expensive.��


    I can��t help but have a smirk on my face. Looks like my first transaction went down smoothly albeit a little unexpected.


    ��Hear that, Eri? It really was a good idea to gather parts of the monster that we defeated along the way!��


    ��Yes, I know. In fact, I��m the one that suggest to gather monster parts to be solved in the town, right?��


    ������


    We head back to the counter where the Girl gave us two small sacks with the one full of gold coins and the other, of silver.


    ��Here��s the payment. Remember, we are not, in any ways, responsible if you were to lose that money or someone stole it inside the guild building, it��s your own fault for not being careful enough.��If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    ��Yup, we understand����


    It seems that the girl sensed the ill intents of the adventurers around the guild and indirectly warned me against it.


    ���� looks like we��re not be going to leave this building peacefully, right Eri?��


    Eri put her hands on the daggers at her back and readies herself. I on the other hand, stayed calm.


    ��Good luck out there, folks. If you have any questions, feel free to approach me.��


    ��Yes, will do�� By the way, I have a question.��


    ��What is it?��


    ��If, for example, someone start a fight and threatens the two of us, we can retaliate without someone pressing charges to us, am I right?��


    ��What��s ��Pressing Charges��?��


    ��In other words, no one will complain to any officials if we were to, for example, accidentally kill someone because they started a fight with us.��


    ��I would rather not have a corpse in the building. But feel free to break some bones and knock them unconscious or just leave them near the death��s door. Just don��t kill them.��


    ��Noted. Once again, um����


    ��Oh, I forgot. The name��s Izuna.��


    ��Ok, Izuna. We��ll be back.��


    The moment we started walking towards the exit, the Adventurers inside the guild begun to gather towards us. Our path is then blocked by three buffed men, immediately after that, we��re surrounded by 20 people who looked intimidating.


    A man, who appears to be the leader, walked towards us with an unpleasant grin on his face.


    ��Looks like you��ve got a great haul back there, right?��


    ��Um, excuse me but, who are you?��


    ��Oh, you didn��t know us?��


    ��Nope, not in the slightest. And we��ve just arrived in this town for the first time so����


    ��Hahaha! No wonder you don��t know us. We, The Dragon Fang, is the highest-ranking party in this town. And I, Cero Ddgeir, is the leader and also one of the highest-ranking adventurer in this area.��


    ��Great! We are travelers whose name isn��t worth to remember. So, if you would, we��ll go on our way.��


    Cero blocked our way.


    ��No, no, no. That is not how we run things in here.��


    ��Excuse me but, what?��


    ��You see, if you want to leave this guild peacefully, leave the gold coins behind. We��re kind enough so you can keep the silver ones for yourselves.��


    At this point, Eri��s hands is already in the grip of the daggers.


    ��And also, leave your female companion in here. Don��t worry, she��ll be fine with us. Hahaha!��


    I still remained calm despite the current situation.


    ��Sorry but we cannot do that. If you would excuse us, we��ll take our leave.��


    ��No, no, no. That is not that easy boy. If you don��t follow what we said, we will make sure to break all the bones in your body and steal all your money and your girl. We��re kind enough to offer you a way for us to benefit with each other. You��ll walk out unscathed and the girl will be happy with us and we both have our share of the money. Just accept it.��


    ��Hans, these guys are really getting on my nerves right now. I would like to kill them now if you would allow it.��


    ��Remember what Izuna said, right? We need to make sure that no dead bodies will be on the floor. However, you can cut an arm or two if you want.��


    Cero, now looks irritated, approached the two of us and grab Eri by the wrist.


    ��What the hell are you talking about?! Not that I care, I��m going to take the girl now. Better hand the coins while we��re still in a good mood, kid.��


    ��Release me����


    Eri wasn��t showing any emotions in her face. She��s facial expressions are blank.


    ��Huh? Whatd��ya say?��


    ��I said release me����


    ��No can do, little fine girl. You see, you��re our property now. You need to obey our every order.��


    A split second later, blood was spurting in Cero��s Arm.


    ��Eh?��


    ��Get your filthy hands off me, you mongrel.��


    It took Cero a few seconds before realizing that his right arm was gone and blood is spurting out of the bisected part.


    ��WHAAAAAAA!!! IT HURTS! IT FUCKING HURTS!!!��


    Cero scream in agony while his comrades were still confused of what��s happening.


    ��Just keep your bloodlust to the minimum, Eri.��


    ��Yup, I know�� Well then, who��s next?��


    Cero��s comrades began getting themselves together and attacked Eri at the same time. The Problem is�� No one can hit her.


    The thugs shout every time they strike, which make them look more like a samurai but rowdier. And to make things worse, they haven��t even landed a single hit on Eri.


    A few minutes have passed and the thugs were showing signs of exhaustion. Cero, on the other hand, is lying unconsciously on the floor while his right arm is still bleeding. I silently went to Cero��s place and use my ability to stop the bleeding by imagining the wounds being covered with new skin.


    Meanwhile, on Eri��s side, the thugs that were surrounding her were out of breath and exhausted. Eri yawned. Looks like she��s absentmindedly dodging the attacks with minimal effort, therefore she hasn��t gone full strength and is currently bored by that.


    ��Is that all you��ve got? How petty and embarrassing. And to think that you��re all from the strongest party in this town? What a shame. Well, if you can��t retaliate anymore, it��s my turn then.��


    Eri gather momentum for a few second then strike the 2 in front of her with ease. Using the dim parts of the guild, Eri act like an assassin and lurks in there. One by one, the thugs�� number slowly declined. Some were slashed, bludgeoned, hit, but still alive. Eri attacks with precision and finesse, like a professional ballet dancer. Except, she��s not wearing any ballet equipment and her performance is the skillful takedowns of the enemy.


    It only took several seconds to completely annihilate the whole Dragon Fang party. Eri was standing proudly in the middle of the unconscious bodies of the enemy. The sight of her holding her daggers while her red hooded cloak is fluttering in the wind, is absolutely awesome, like a poster for an action movie. She then murmured something.


    ��Weak. Humans are weak.��


    Eri then looked at me and showed a little smirk, probably wants to brag about her physical prowess.


    ��Ok, you��re strong, I get it. Can we calm ourselves now? Did you make sure to not kill someone in the middle of the fight?��


    ��I did, that��s why it��s so unsatisfying for me.��


    I ignored what she said and looked at Izuna in the counter. What I saw was her terrified expression while being backed up in the corner of the counter. I thought that she was professional and will keep her calm demeanor even after witnessing that kind of savageness and violence. Looks like she can��t handle extreme violence in her watch.


    I then looked at Eri and I immediately understood what��s happening. Izuna wasn��t being afraid of seeing violence inside the guild, in fact, she should��ve been fond of that already because she even warned us about what might happen here. She was afraid of something, rather, someone else. She was afraid of Eri, specifically, her being a demon. Eri didn��t even noticed but her hood has been rolled back and her sheep-like horns are in full display.


    ��Hey Hans, I thought this girl is professional. Why is she afraid of seeing a little violence?��


    ��She��s not afraid of that. She was afraid of you.��


    ��Huh? Me? Oh, is it because of my monstrous abilities?��


    ��No, not that.��


    I pointed at her head.


    ��Your hood has been rolled back.��


    She then realized what I was saying after I point my finger in her head.


    ��Ah����


    ��You��re careless, you know that?��


    We then approached Izuna little by little. In response, she tried to claw her way out of the corner. We rushed towards her and when she saw us rushing, she let go of a very sharp shout.


    ��Hey! Izuna! Calm Down!��


    She continues to struggle.


    ��Hans, this girl won��t even stop struggling. Shall we kill her?��


    After hearing the words ��Kill her��, Izuna struggled even more.


    ��Hey, is killing your only method to solve a problem? Stop with those killing thoughts, will you?��


    Eri shrugged me. Izuna is still struggling to get out of my grip, even though she really won��t be able to unless I let her go.


    Eri then draw her face towards Izuna��s face and stared at her in the eyes.


    ��Hiii!!!��


    After letting out a weird shriek, Izuna became unconscious.


    <hr>


    Ahh, my head hurts.


    Looks like I fainted in the middle of working hours.


    I sure hope that master wouldn��t deduct this to my paycheck.


    In the first place, why did I faint? It seems I can��t remember anything from the moment before I fainted, and that��s weird.


    Anyways, what happened, happened. I shouldn��t worry too much about it. In fact, I feel really comfortable right now, looks like I was laying down on a soft surface. Might as well wake up while I��m at it.


    ��Hey, she��s waking up. You better hide first, we don��t want her to go unconscious again.��


    ��Ok.��


    I heard a familiar voice telling someone to hide. But why?


    As I opened my eyes, A humanlike figure crossed my gaze. The figure approached me.


    ��Hey, do you remember me?��


    A familiar voice came from the figure. I remember this voice, it belongs to that one absurd guy that came earlier in this guild.


    I tried to sit while still holding my throbbing head.


    ��Yes�� yes, I do remember you. ��Yer the absurd guy that brought a huge amount of monster parts, right?��


    ��Absurd is a bit mean, you know.��


    ��Oh really, well, sorry ��bout that.��


    ��It��s fine. By the way, I never told my name to you didn��t I? I��m Johannes, you can call me Hans, if you want.��


    ��Ok Hans. Once again, nice to meet you. Now, back to the matter at hand. What exactly happened. I do remember you and your partner�� By the way, where is your partner?��


    ��Well�� She has some matters to attend to.��


    ��But I heard you talking to someone earlier and telling them to hide.��


    ��That��s�� Um�� Nothing! That��s Absolutely nothing, forget about me.��


    I��m becoming more and more suspicious about this man here.


    ��I don��t know what is it that you��re hiding, Hans, but if that would be the answer to why I can��t remember anything after you left the counter, then I must know it. Now spill it to me, will you?!��


    The man in front of me is currently fidgeting the hem of his shirt. He can��t even look at me in the eyes. He��s definitely hiding something, that��s for sure.


    ������


    ��You��re going to stay quiet, huh? Should I force it out to you?��


    The man then looked straight at me.


    ��I wouldn��t do that if I were you, Izuna. I am sure that you know how powerful I am, right? I would like to avoid conflict as possible. So please, let��s not head that way.��


    ��But I have the rights to know the reason for my sudden fainting��


    The man sighed and stayed quiet for a few seconds. After that, his face became dead serious.


    ��I will tell you. But you need to keep this a secret to everyone. You got it?��


    ��Sure, if it��s that confidential, then I won��t blabber about it carelessly.��


    ��Okay, just please don��t be so freaked out like the last time.


    ��Freaked Out?��


    Hans looked towards the door and called someone.


    ��Hey, Eri, you can enter now.��


    The door opened and came a girl in a red hood. And I know that she��s Han��s Partner. But I still don��t know why is she related to my sudden fainting.


    ��So? How is that girl related to me fainting?��


    The Girl went straight towards me and looked at me straight in the eyes.


    My body suddenly reacts to it by backing out. At the same time, I felt fear. Why am I afraid of her?


    ��So, your mind can��t remember but your body sure does.��


    ��What do you mean by that?��


    ��Exactly what Eri said. You were subconsciously afraid of her.��


    ��Huh?! I don��t see any reason for me to fear that girl!��


    ��Izuna, I want you to stay calm, whatever happens, do not panic. Did you get that?��


    ��Sure. But I don��t think a mere girl can instigate fear in me.��


    ��Well then, Eri, you can show it to her.��


    ��Ok.��


    The Girl slowly removed her hood. And as I saw what��s hidden in that hood, it immediately struck me��


    Fear��


    An unsurmountable feeling of terror.


    Right now, I am right in front of a full-grown, deadly existence.


    ��


    ��


    ��


    A Demon.


    <hr>


    ��And�� She��s screaming. What should we do?��


    Right now, Izuna was screaming while clawing her way towards the corner of the room. Eri blurted out her observation while standing beside me.


    This is to be expected. After all, Izuna saw a fleshed-out Demon right in front of her. Of course, she��ll be frightened.


    ��I��ll do something about this. In the meantime, just stay where you are.��


    ��Okay.��


    I approached the crying Izuna slowly. She��s still trying to claw her way out of the wall but, to no avail, she couldn��t do it. The moment I reached her, I grab her shoulder resulting to her being frozen in fear.


    ��Hey! Calm down!��


    ��WAAAAAAAHHHH!!!��


    Looks like she wouldn��t calm down no matter how I talked to her. Might as well bring her back by force.


    I slowly raised my left hand and slap the hell out of Izuna. Of course, I regulated my strength as to not deal an irreparable damage.


    After being slapped, Izuna stopped crying and looked at me with a surprised expression. Looks like I somehow managed to pull her back.


    ��Have you calm yourself down?��


    Izuna, while still in the state of shock, managed to squeeze out an answer.


    ��Y-yes�� I think so.��


    ��Now, I need you to remain calm, can you do that?��


    ��I guess�� By the way, I had a weird dream. It was me looking at a Demon in front of me.��


    She laughed after saying that. Looks like she��s still denying what she saw.


    ��The truth is, Izuna, it was not a dream.��


    ��What do you mean it wasn��t a dream?��


    ��You promised me to remain calm, right? If you were to scream like that again, I will slap you with much more force. So please, I need you to stay really calm.��


    I looked at Eri and signaled her to go to where we are.


    After Eri entered Izuna��s field of vision, Izuna began shaking uncontrollably, but she didn��t scream. Looks like she didn��t want to be slapped for a second time.


    ��Good, you didn��t look as scared as you did earlier. I think we can have a proper conversation now. But first, wipe your tears and snot, it��s disgusting.��


    Despite shaking, Izuna managed to wipe her tears. After that, we head towards the bed where Izuna slept before.


    ��Now, once again, I am Johannes Aarvold and the Demon beside me is Erylla Erfreth. You can call her Eri.��


    ��No she can��t. Only those that I trust can call me that.��


    ��Whatever. Anyways, I��m glad that you��ve managed to calm yourself.��


    ��I still am mildly shaking in fear, though. So, why is a Demon and a human together?��


    ��Well, it is a long story. But before I tell you about it, can you make a promise to me first?��


    ��What is it?��


    ��I want you to keep what we are going to talk about, to yourself. Everything you hear from us should be kept a secret.��


    ��I would like to avoid getting caught up in a shady situation or deal with particularly shady people, but I guess I have no choice, right? But why would you go to such lengths just to tell me? Is it better to keep it for yourselves?��


    Izuna has a point. I can cover all that happened by just faking a story or killing all those that are involved.


    ��First of all, I want to have connections with the guild, and I want it to be built with trust, not with fear. We also need someone that we can trust whenever we come back from our adventures, and you seem trustworthy enough. That��s why I��m going to tell you our story.��


    ��Ok, I got it, I won��t tell anyone about the story of you two. If I were to be trusted, then I need to avoid betraying your trust, right.��


    I fetched a stool near the door. I positioned myself in front of Izuna while Eri is standing beside me.


    ��Let��s get to the most important thing first. The Demon King is dead.��


    As I said that, a look of disbelief appeared on Izuna��s face.


    ��Hahahaha. You are funny. You��re telling me that Demon King Troskaldt is already dead? The United Empire��s Alliance��s forces haven��t even reached the Demon King��s Castle. Does the Demon King succumb to some kind of sickness?��


    ��No�� He was killed.��


    ��Killed? Did his subordinates betrayed him? Because the only ones who are capable to defeat him are his generals and the heroes that the United Empire��s Alliance�� Wait�� If I were to assess the situation I am right now�� then the ones who killed the Demon King is����


    ��Exactly what you��re thinking. I am the one who killed the Demon King�� And also, his generals.��


    ��It feels like I should��ve been shocked but as far as what happens throughout this day, I don��t even think that you��re lying. But, to defeat such an entity as the Demon King, you need to be at least a Rank A adventurer to atleast join the subjugation forces of the United Empire''s Alliance, and yet, it would still be a bloodshed and victory is not guaranteed. You need to be at leastOne of the Legendary Heroes just to have a chance in defeating the Demon King and his Generals. I don��t really doubt your strength but if I were to look at you, you look like you��re just a simple commoner that has nothing to do with what��s currently happening in the war.��


    ��That��s rude. Haven��t you heard of the saying ��Do not judge the book by its cover��?��


    ��Nope��


    ��Figures�� But it��s true that I defeated the Demon King. If you��re still doubting me, then I have someone that can tell you what exactly happened. More like a witness, you can say.��


    ��And I guess that your witness is that Demon over there�� Erylla was it?��


    ��Stop casually calling me by my name, human.��


    ��Hey Hans, are you sure she��s not hostile towards us humans?��


    ��Don��t worry, It��s just because of her past.��


    ��Ok�� So, who exactly is this Demon?��


    ��Eri, can you introduce yourself�� Your real self.��


    ��Are you sure Hans? It is still way easier to just kill her.��


    Upon hearing the word ��Kill��, Izuna begins to become stiff once again.


    ��We talked about this earlier, right? No killing will occur. And Eri, can you refrain yourself from blurting your thoughts of killing?��


    Eri shrugged me.


    ��Now, woman. You wish to learn what truly happened at the Demon King��s castle, right? Then I shall tell you all. But if you were to even slip our information to the masses, I would not hesitate to kill you.��


    ��On a second thought, can you please not involve me with you people? I still want to live.��


    ��Sorry, Izuna. But I already decided to trust you. You have no choice but to agree.��


    ��That��s unfair!��


    ��Well, I��ve grown fond of you and you seems to be a good person so�� there you have it.��


    Izuna pouted, but she looks somehow happy about being trusted.


    ��Ok, Eri. You can tell her our story.��


    ��Well then. But this is going to be a long one so better be prepared. And please do not forget your promise.��


    ���� I hope this is a right choice.��


    Izuna blurted something, then looked at Eri to listen to her story.


    ��I am Erylla Erfreth, also known as ��The General of the Blades Efreet��. I am One of the Six Demon King��s Generals.��


    Izunabegan to look pale and her whole body trembled. Her eyes are wide opened and she��s trying so hard not to scream in terror. She then blurted out something.


    ��Y-you are�� The Assassin General Efreet?!��

 Chapter 6 – An Undeniable Truth… And a Newfound Comrade.

    ��Assassin General Efreet?��


    The name sounds intimidating. But for Eri to be described as such, I can��t help but smile a little. On the other hand, Izuna still looks frightened.


    ��Don��t tell me�� You don��t know the Demon that is accompanying you?��


    ��Ah, no, no. I already know that she��s a Demon King General. I was just surprised that Eri has that kind of title�� fufufu�� HAHAHA!��


    Eri looked at me irritated.


    ��What��s your problem with that?!��


    ��No, I don��t have any problem with your title. It��s just so embarrassing to hear.��


    ��I should��ve just killed you before.��


    ��Hoho�� can you?��


    ��I can��t�� That��s why it��s irritating!��


    While we��re talking, Izuna looked at me.


    ��The Assassin General can��t kill you?��


    The one who answered Izuna��s question is Eri herself.


    ��Just because I can��t kill him doesn��t mean I��m weak. Just so you know, this guy��s insanely strong.��


    ��Now, you��re just playing me for a stupid person. There��s no way that a Human is able to withstand a Demon, let alone overpower them, unless you are a Demon Half-bred or one of the Legendary Heroes or Rank A Adventurers.��


    ��You know what, it��s better to just listen to Eri��s story.��


    Eri then told the story of what actually happened in the Demon King��s Castle.


    <hr>


    ��Not only did you Kill the Demon King, you��ve also managed to annihilate his Generals? You know what, I��m not surprised anymore. You really are an absurd person.��


    Izuna looks like she��s in the middle of processing all of the things that she heard just now.


    ��What do you expect me to do? Cower while I��m getting killed? That��s not going to happen.��


    ��That��s not my point! It��s just that you are the only person I know that can rival the whole United Empire��s Alliance��s Forces. At the least, you are on par with the Legendary Heroes themselves, maybe even greater��


    ��Oh�� So, should I thank you for that?��


    ��Huh? Why?��


    ��Well, you��ve just complimented me, right?��


    Izuna sighed deeply.


    ��By the way, Eri. I have a question to you?��


    ��What is it Hans?��


    ��What are the names of those generals and�� You have your own title, right? If so, then I reckon your fellow generals have one too.��


    ��That��s your question?��


    ��Yes.��


    ��Come to think of it, you��ve attacked us without even knowing who we are.��


    ��Yup. And I managed to win.��


    Eri stared at me blankly.


    ��I��ll just answer your question����


    ��We, the Demon King��s Generals, are a group of individuals that are hand-picked by the Demon King himself. He acknowledged our strength and personally recruited us. Each of the Generals had tremendous skill in either physical combat or magical combat. The Leader of the Generals is Azrath Atria, The Right-Hand Man of the Demon King and the one that holds the title of Azrath the Conqueror. He was given that title because he leads the conquest for the Demon King and is really good at that. He is a highly trained Pure-Blooded Demon that belonged to the House of Atria, one of the esteemed clan in Balros.��


    ��Azrath Atria, The Wrath of the Demon King. I once saw the once that survived the raid that was led by Azrath himself. The stories of the survivors are bone-chilling.��


    ��You��re talking about the man in full armor, right? The one that gave the order to kill me.��


    ��Yes. He is Azrath.��


    ��Ok. I just thought that he��s to cool for someone who is downed in just a couple of second. Heck, his title is way cooler than what he actually is. Hahaha!��


    ��You know that the weird one is you, right? A normal human wouldn��t even think of fighting, let alone barging, in the Demon King��s Castle. He��s the most powerful among the 6 of us. We can��t even rival his strength, even if the 5 of us attacked him simultaneously.��


    ��Well, thank goodness I��m weird. I would��ve died there if I weren��t.��


    ��I knew you��d say that. Let��s get back to the topic. The next General is Garga Grul, He is a Demon Giant that holds the title of Garga the Executioner. He was merciless. And believe me when I say merciless, I really mean it. Every time Garga joins a raid or a clash, Bloodshed is guaranteed to happen. I can understand why he does that, though. His race belongs to a subspecies of Demons. His Clan, the Grul, separated themselves from the rest of the Giants and went in the Forest of Algol to live peacefully. But because Algol is near a Human Kingdom, Garga��s Clan was always being attacked by human adventurers. One night, while resting, The Grul Clan was attacked by adventurers and tried to wipe them out. Garga was abruptly woken up by his instincts and saw almost all of his clan laying on the ground, bleeding to death. What made him rage more, however, is the scene that unfolded in her vision as soon as he wakes up. He saw his parents being stabbed by multiple people. That��s when Garga started his Blind rage. He killed every last person he could see in the area with his club. Even though, the humans have the advantage in terms of their count, Garga manages to kill them all by utilizing the attacker��s state of chaos after watching their comrades die one by one. After that incident, Garga stayed in the Forest and killed all the humans that would dare enter it. That��s what caught the Demon King��s attention and he proceeded to recruit him, promising him the countless lives that he could take in the battlefield.��


    ��You know what, Eri? I��m beginning to feel guilty about what I did.��


    I looked at Izuna to see her reaction and what I saw is a face full of grief.


    ��Izuna, what��s wrong?��


    ��No, nothing, really. It��s just that�� Balron killed my Best friend a few years ago. She was just trying to hunt for any animal that can be her family��s food for the rest of the day. Next day, a news came, saying that a girl was killed by the Giant in the Forest. Just remembering it makes me feel sad and hurt.��


    ��Um�� I guess I am not guilty about what I��ve done, at all. Geez, being morally correct is pretty hard if you think about it.��


    ��Ahem! The next general is Cunil Unach, A one-horned Demon skilled in using a lance. He was holding the title of Cunil the Destoyer. With his Wide Area Magic, he can decimate a fortress I mere seconds. The Magic is called Gae Bolg. He is-��


    ��Wait, wait, wait! What did you say? Did you just say Gae Bolg?��


    ��Yes.��


    ��What the heck! A lance wielding guy with a magic ability to decimate a fortress with a single blow and the ability��s name is Gae Bolg? Aren��t that too much similar?��


    ��What are you saying?��


    This is just too similar! I didn��t think that this world would have someone like that. A person that came straight from a certain Fate game.


    ��It��s just like a certain Heroic Spirit from a certain game I played. If I were correct, He fought a guard dog�� Or a beast, whatever. And obtained its position, am I right?��


    ��How did you know that? I thought you were not from this world?��


    ��Yes! And that is my point. Come to think of it, the general��s name is just an anagram of the name of the guy in that game that I knew in my old world. Cu Chulainn.��


    ��I don��t understand what you��re saying.��


    ��Ahhhhh�� I��ll just leave it at that, you don��t know it anyways. I��m just surprised, that��s all. And, you don��t need to tell me his story, I think I already know all about it.��


    Eri and Izuna had a confused look at their faces. Eri then continued what she was saying.


    ��Ok�� The next general is Calyndra Cynyx. She is also a pure-blood from one of the very few Demon Clans that were able to use Magic. Calyndra was special, however. She is a genius magician that has the affinity of all the basic elements like water, fire, earth, air, light and darkness. Not only is she compatible with every element, she is also really talented. She can combine different elements that can be used as her attack. Because of that, she was given the title of Calyndra the Elemental. The Demon King became interested to her talent and desired to recruit her personally.��


    ��Calyndra�� she��s the girl that begged me to let her live, right?��


    ��Yes, that is her.��


    ��So, she��s a genius�� Not that I care. Besides, I defeated her in just a few seconds together with the other generals.��


    ��I know I already told you this, but I��ll say it anyway�� You��re just weird and absurd.��


    ��That��s rude! Mind your manners, will you?��


    ��Coming from a person who not only did barge into a castle uninvited but also kill all of its inhabitants.��


    ��Ok, ok. I��m sorry about that. Just continue your story.��


    ��The last general is Mephistopheles Nyx, The spirit of Mt. Mephistopheles. Mt. Mephistopheles is located at Metea in Balros. Metea is once home to a village named Arfel. Arfel was a bountiful village that specializes on Farming. 200 years ago, Mt. Mephistopheles erupted and resulted into the whole village being wiped out. All of the settlers are killed because the Volcano erupted without even a sign beforehand. After the eruption, the volcano became more active. The Demon King became interested on the said Volcano, saying that there must be an entity that keeps the Volcano active. The Demon King is not mistaken, there in the volcano lives a certain spirit that guarded the Volcano. The Demon King subjugated the Spirit of Mephistopheles and made it his servant, and he named him Nyx. Nyx is the second strongest when compared to other generals, but he is also the least famous. He is always at the Demon King��s side to protect him personally. I��m pretty sure that he had a title but only the Demon King knows what it is. That��s all of the generals.��


    Izuna shivered slightly after hearing Eri��s description of the other generals.


    ��Even hearing about them bring chills to me. They really are so powerful. I wonder how humanity managed to escape extinction for a long time.��


    ��It really sounded like they were all awesome and powerful individuals when you talk about them�� but in reality, they are really not that awesome. Maybe you��re just over-reacting.��


    ��No, I don��t think Eri-�� umm, Erylla is lying. After what I heard, I also think that you��re just crazy powerful.��The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there.


    ��Yup, that��s what I think too. It��s just fun messing with Eri.��


    Eri glared at me.


    ��Haha, sorry about that. Anyway, Izuna, now that you know our story, I hope you understand our situation now.��


    ��Yes, unfortunately, I do. I am also willing to help you.��


    ��Thank you very much, Izuna. We really appreciate it.��


    ��Now then, can I go back to my work now? We will discuss everything after my shift. Is that all right?��


    ��Ok. We��ll wait.��


    <hr>


    After that, Izuna returned to her work and the Guild supervisor lectured her. Izuna explained to the Guild supervisor that she fainted due to lack of sleep and the people who saw her collapse brought her to an empty room at the back of the guild, and the guild supervisor bought it. Still, Izuna didn��t reveal anything about our conversation and the fact that I am the one who killed the Demon King. Looks like I��m right on choosing her as one of our trusted connections. Anyways, after the sun goes down, Izuna meet us on the caf�� that Eri and I first went right after reaching this town.


    <hr>


    Izuna entered the caf�� and began looking around for us.


    ��Izuna! Here!��


    Izuna waved at us then went towards our table.


    ��What would you like to drink?��


    ��Ilhof is fine.��


    ��You don��t have to be modest. Just order what you want, it��s on me.��


    ��Nah, Ilhof��s fine. Besides, I��m still full.��


    ��Ok, then.��


    We ordered Ilhof for the three of us. Man, this Ilhof is too good�� Or I��m just becoming a coffee addict, I don��t know.


    ��So�� What now? What are you guys planning to do?��


    ��That��s the problem, we don��t have anything to do. My initial plan is to gather all the experience I can have and face the Demon King. What happened is the exact opposite of what I have planned. Now everything��s gone jackshit. When I said everything, I didn��t mean the fate of the whole world, but the fate of my adventures.��


    ��That��s your problem, not mine.��


    ��You know what, Eri? Just shut your mouth. Besides, this is our adventure so this is also your problem.��


    ��Whatever.��


    ��So�� what am I supposed to do in here?��


    Izuna was looking at us with confused expression.


    ��Well, you��re working for the guild, right? Do you have any, like, super hard request that we can accept?��


    Izuna looked at me with doubting eyes. I don��t know why but she��s being really skeptic. At that moment, the waiter served our orders. While Izuna��s still quietly thinking, we proceed to drink the Ilhof. And it was really good.


    After a while, Izuna put down the glass that she��s holding and told us what she��s thinking.


    ��Yes, there are some of those super hard quests that you can take. But you still have no qualifications for that.��


    ��Is being strong still not enough?��


    ��You need a real proof. And for that, you need to apply for a Guild Membership. By applying for the Guild Membership, we can determine your strength, level and rank.��


    ��Just like a video game, huh.��


    ��What��s a video game?��


    ��A game you play digitally�� Well, it��s no use telling you that. Please continue with your explanation.��


    ��Ok then, to take a Quest to the Guild, you need a Guild Card. The Guild Card contains your information. Also, you can only take a Quest that suits your rank since the Quests and the Creatures are being ranked as well.��


    ��So, how will you determine our ranks?��


    ��That depends on your strength. The machine will be able to detect your rank once you registered so you will have no problem in regards to the fairness in ranking.��


    ��So we just need to have a Guild Card?��


    ��Yes, that is essential if you were to be adventurers yourselves.��


    ��You said that the Quest and Creatures are ranked too, right? Can you establish it more?��


    ��Well, the ranking of that is based on the threat that it poses towards the people, or in some cases, the whole world. For example, Creatures like slimes are ranked at the lowest which is Rank F while the Demon King is Ranked S and its generals ranked A.��


    ��How do you determine their rank? Like what will it takes to qualify for each rank?��


    ��This��ll be long but it can be very useful to the both of you so I can spare some time...��


    Izuna talked about the ranking system. Basically, this is what she said:


    Rank F �C Existence that will not be able to kill you, like Slimes and Praerats.


    Rank E �C Existence that poses very low threats but can injure you, like Wild Boars and Forest Hounds


    Rank D �C Existence that will definitely injure you, like Killer Bees and Rabid Hounds.


    Rank C �C Existence that has Thirty to Fifty Percent Chance of killing you. Under this category are Ice Wolves, Sabretooth and Dark Unicorn.


    Rank B �C Existence that poses High threat with a High Chance of Killing you. This includes: Wyvern, Gryphons, Giant Water Serpents and Cerberus.


    Rank A �C Existence that poses High threats and is guaranteed to kill several people in its wake. This includes: Draconic Beasts, Shadow Panthers, Giant Dark Bear, White Serpent and others.


    Rank S �C Existence that poses High Threat to the Different races. Someone that needs to be dealt with immediately. Existence such as a Fully-Grown Elemental Dragon, The Hydra, The Giant Ocean Beast and the Demon King belongs to this category.


    Rank SS �C Existence that poses threat to a continent. This threats normally doesn��t come around often and will not attack if not provoked. The Elder Dragon, Abyssal Giants and Phantasmals belongs in this category.


    Rank SSS �C Existence that poses threat to the whole World. These threats are very rarely come and once it appeared, the Races has no choice but to cooperate with each other. And it will still not guarantee a victory. And the Casualties will be outrageous. The Four Guardians of Veneofel are considered Rank SS individually but if they were to group up, they will be considered as Rank SSS threat. Existence such as The Celestial Beast, The Devourer of Worlds and The Fallen Gods are also in this category.


    Rank X �C This rank is for everything that is considered as the most powerful existence of all. These existences can literally destroy the whole world with just a single snap. Gods belong to this category.


    ��What��s your Rank, Izuna?��


    ��I��m probably a Rank C Adventurer.��


    ��Oh, Izuna, you��re pretty high up in the rankings, aren��t you? And Eri, so you��re a Rank A�� That��s Awesome!��


    ��You��re being sarcastic, aren��t you?��


    ��No, I truly mean it.��


    ��I wonder about that.��


    Eri shrugged.


    ��So, Izuna, what do you think my Rank will be?��


    ��I don��t really know. But if what you��re saying is true, then I think you��re in the leagues of the Rank S to SS.��


    ��Oh, you��re overrating me.��


    ��No, that��s really what could happen once you went to register for Guild Membership.��


    ��Well, we��ll know it when we��ve already done it. Also, can you recommend us an inn for tonight? We��ve just reached this town earlier this morning so we really don��t know anything about this place.��


    ��If that��s the case, I would recommend the Wolf��s Inn. Just say to the owner that I am the one that recommended their place for you and they��ll surely give you a discount. Is there anything else you want to discuss?��


    ��That��s all for today. We will just go to the guild to ask you if we have things that we don��t know.��


    ��If that��s all, then I probably should go. I have an early shift tomorrow so I need to sleep early.��


    ��Ok then, See you later. And Izuna�� Thank You for not telling anyone about our secret.��


    ��Don��t worry about that, I can keep a secret or two. See you later, Hans, Erylla.��


    ��Just Eri.��


    ��Huh?��


    ��You could call me Eri.��


    ��Really?��


    ��Oh, Eri, I don��t know that you��re a softie.��


    ��No! I only want to deepen the trust between me and Izuna. That��s why I want her to call me by my nickname. Besides, Erylla��s too formal for me.��


    ��Then, See you later, Eri.��


    Eri nod her head.


    After Izuna left, we stayed in the caf�� for a few minutes without someone talking.


    ��Should we go now?��


    ��Ok.��


    We went towards the counter and payed. After that, we went towards the inn that Izuna suggested. We payed 2 gold coins up front and the counter lady was shocked about the gold coin. We��ve barely avoided the ruckus that would��ve formed if the counter lady were to blurt out that we payed 2 gold coins up front. I explained to the counter lady that we will stay in here indefinitely, that��s why we payed you upfront with 2 gold coins. As a special service, the counter lady gave us the most luxurious room in the hotel. Eri and I slept in a different room. Since we have too many money, I don��t see any problem on staying in different room, in fact, that should be expected.


    My room is next to Eri so we went to our rooms together, after I reached my room, I said good night to Eri and she just shrugged it but as she reached her room door, she looked at me and nodded then went straight to the room.


    I lay down in the bed and looked at the ceiling. The bed was a lot huger than a normal sized one. Therefore, it is really uncomfortable to sleep in here. I can��t even sleep, I��m becoming increasingly uncomfortable every time I tried to position myself in this huge bed. Because of that, I can��t sleep.


    ��Well, if you won��t let me sleep, then there��s nothing I can do about it. Might as well take a night walk to calm my nerves and exhaust myself before sleeping.��


    I went outside the inn and went to a walk outside. The alleys were already deserted. Looks like the people are already asleep. I walked towards the guild building and went towards the caf��. After that, I went to the center of the Town and sat in a bench there for a few minutes while contemplating about this world and my involvement to it.


    The Center of the Town looks eerie at night. Even so, the scenery of a town under the sea of stars makes this place less eerie and more romantic.


    ��This world really looks old yet mesmerizing. The entirety of this world is far more awesome than my old world. I will surely tell this adventure to my granddaughter, this might be a good bedtime story����


    I decided to walk around the Town without any plan on where to go.


    After walking for several minutes, I decided to go back to the inn and head towards the roof. I lay down in the roof and looked at the sky.


    The sky is clear, there are no signs of a cloud in sight. The moon is nowhere to be seen so I guess today is the new-moon phase for its moon. There��s something about this sky view that keeps me being mesmerized by it.


    Just as I thought, this sky is really different. There are no constellations that I know in this sky. This sky is undoubtedly beautiful yet dangerously mesmerizing. It really is calming me though. An unfamiliar sky in a different world. It would definitely be different. But I can say this without any hesitation.


    ��This Sky is so Gorgeous.��


    This world is not that bad, in fact, this world is beautiful. If I can show this to Mira and Eric, I would. I��m sure they will not be as thrilled as me but still, it will be fun to look to the sky together while sharing stories.


    ��Ahh, I wish Mira and Eric is with me right now.��


    Something came out to my mind and unconsciously blurted it.


    ��I miss Mira.��


    Yes, I really miss her. Right before I was summoned here, I technically confessed to her about my feelings�� And apparently, she liked me too. If only the old geezer didn��t summon me here, I would probably be all lovey dovey with Mira now.


    I imagine me and Mira under the sea of stars in a roof of an old building, just relaxing and talking about anything. It would��ve been so romantic if that were to happen.


    I heaved a sigh.


    I lay down there for a few more minutes just to appreciate this beautiful sky. Suddenly, A thought crossed my mind.


    If this world is different, then surely there are more picturesque landscapes all over. Since I have nothing to do, travelling would��ve been great.


    ��If I have nothing to do, might as well enjoy this world to its fullest. Visit all sorts of Picturesque Landscapes, eat all sorts of exotic food, I know! I should have an adventure that��s never before done. Defeat High Ranking Creatures and just do what we want. There are no one who can stop me so might as well enjoy it to the fullest. I can also gather comrades along the way. Heck, might as well fight against the gods while I��m at it. There��s so many things to do, I need to start early.��


    Suddenly, I felt a presence heading towards me.


    ��I don��t have anyone to serve now so I am free. I don��t have anything to do either. And I think I am pretty skilled in combat. Might as well tag along with you in your adventures. I also want to be stronger than my current self. Besides, I have a feeling that your adventure will be an awesome one. So, count me in, this��ll be fun.��


    I looked behind me and saw Eri sitting while looking towards the horizons.


    ��Sure! Let��s make this adventure the one that we will never forget, even after we part ways.��


    ��Yeah! And I��ll fight with you again once I became stronger. I promise that this time, I will win.��


    ��Hohoho, I��m waiting for that moment. Give me all that you got when that happens.��


    ��You bet it!��


    Eri raised her elbow and point her forearm towards me. Looks like the custom in here is to link forearms together as a sign of camaraderie.


    I linked my forearm to hers. In that moment, what I saw in Eri��s face is a genuine smile. A smile that I didn��t know, a former Demon King��s General can do.


    ��Let��s head back. We have a long day ahead of us so we need all the sleep that we can have.��


    ��Sure.��


    We went together towards our rooms and said goodnight to each other. Right after that, I lay down on the bed and immediately fell asleep


    <hr>


    Feroas Pass , 7 Kilometers to the North of the Demon King��s Castle. A path between two mountains that leads towards the Demon King Territory. A Day and a half is needed to cross the Pass. The Feroas Pass has a really harsh environment that is either too hot or too cold depending on the time of the day, that��s why it��s been avoided by travelers and soldiers.


    Right now, there are an estimated of 200,000 foot soldiers in the entrance of the Feroas Pass. The Army seems to belong to the United Empire��s Alliance and are sent to execute a counter attack towards the Demon King. There seems to be 5 people in the Army��s Core. They are the ones that commandeered the Army and is essential towards the victory. One is a Knight-looking guy, the next one is a Magician-looking guy, the other one looks like a blacksmith, the next one has a bow latched in her back, and the last one who��s holding two swords. Together, they are the ones that operates the whole army.


    At this moment, it appears that the Knight-looking guy is having a speech towards his army. The content of his speech appears to be their plan on attacking the Demon King. Looks like they chose the Feroas Pass because the Demon King will not expect them to go towards the path that is literally able to kill multiple people.


    The speech goes on for about an hour or less. After that, the Knight-looking guy went to an overlooking place in the vicinity to observe the changes that��s happening in Feroas Pass. He was approached by the Magician-looking lady and brought him snacks while he��s patrolling.


    ��Hey, are you busy?��


    ��Not really, there��s no significant changes in the Pass so I think we can cross the pass tomorrow morning.��


    ��That��s great. By the way, want to talk?��


    ��Sure, what do you want to talk?��


    ��Um�� just some thoughts about our situation. I just want to share it with someone.��


    ��Ok, I��ll listen.��


    ��Thanks�� If we were to succeed in crossing the Pass, then we will be able to finally have a chance on defeating the Demon King.��


    ��Yeah, that��s the plan, but anything else after that relies on us five.��


    A moment of silence enveloped the pair. The Magician Girl is the first one to break the silence.


    ��Say, if we were to defeat the Demon King, this��ll be over right.��


    ��Yes�� I think so�� I don��t really know.��


    ��That��s what they promised us, so it better be the end.��


    ��Don��t worry, if they betray us, we will make sure that they will be crushed.��


    ��I knew you��d say that�� You really are fit to receive your title.��


    ��What are you saying? The five of us received that title, not only me. That means that all of us is necessary to win this war.��


    ��Yeah, but I have a feeling that I��m not really doing things in my part.��


    ��You��re really are helpful, I wish you would appreciate yourself even more. If you��re not here with us, our group will probably collapse easily.��


    ��Thanks for that, I really appreciate it.��


    ��Look, we are the chosen Heroes, we are the only ones that can defeat the Demon King. We need to help each other in order to succeed in our goal.��


    ��It was a really big responsibility for the five of us to handle.��


    ��But we��re the only ones that can do it. Don��t worry, after all of this is over, we will be able to return to our homes. I promise you that I will make sure that we��ll be able to return to our home, to the world that we truly belong. We will return to our old world.��


    The Magician Lady lean towards the Knight Guy��s shoulder, while the Knight guy wrapped her arms around the Magician Lady.

 Chapter 7 – The Guild Registration… And the Fight for their Status.

    The scent of fresh greenery coupled by the scene that unfolded after I opened the window were stimulating my senses. The chirping of birds in the comfort of their trees and the faint smell of sweetness blending in the Morning Breeze. I initially thought that being suddenly transported in this world only brought trouble, but after I saw this scene, it might not be that bad at all. In moments like this, one can only stop and appreciate the unfolding scene in front of them, and that��s what I��m doing right now. I can now prove that�C


    ��Hans! You awake?��


    I can now prove that good things hap�C


    ��Hans! Wake Up!��


    I can now prove that good things happen after bad th�C


    ��Hans! Wake Up Already! We need to head to the Guild Building today.��


    I can now prove that good things happen after bad things occur based on my experie�C


    ��Hans! If you don��t wake up, I will break your door!��


    ��Oh, Come On, Eri! I��m in the middle of my Monologue right now! Can you stay quiet for just a moment?��


    ��I don��t understand what you��re saying, and I don��t care. If you don��t open the door, I will break it!��


    ��Fine! Stop shouting, I��m coming now.��


    I went towards the door and open it. What I saw is Eri in her usual stern expression. Surrounding her are the other occupant of the inn that were drawn by Eri��s shout.


    I quickly let Eri inside and went outside to apologize for the ruckus. The bystanders seem to understand what happened and quickly dispersed after I explained what happened but they somehow thought that Eri and I were couple. I didn��t pry more into that topic because I know that if I do, the conversation will continue and its content will be more personal.


    After dispersing the crowd, I went inside my room only to find Eri looking nonchalant after causing a ruckus outside.


    ��So? Why are you being so loud this early?��


    ��As I said before, we need to go to the guild building today to register.��


    ��You seem to be awfully excited to become an adventurer�� Are you perhaps wanting to become one even before you became a Demon King��s General?��


    ��No! not because of that.��


    ��Then why are you so enthusiastic about going to the Guild Building?��


    ��First of all, I would like to avoid human contact. That��s why I want to leave this town as soon as possible. Second, because I would like to start the adventure that you��re talking about last night. If it means that I��ll get stronger, then I��m down with it.��


    ��Oho�� So you really are looking forward to our adventures, huh. You��re like a kid in her first field trip. Fuhuhuhu.��


    ��What��s with that condescending laugh?! And what��s with the ��Kid and her First Field trip�� thing? Stop mocking me!��


    ��I��m not mocking you. In fact, I��m also looking forward to our various journeys in the future. But for now, let��s head to the Guild Building. And will you please go out of my room? Let me prepare myself privately.��


    ��Ok. But don��t go back to sleep. If you do, I��ll throw you outside the window.��


    ��Ok, ok, I got it. Now, would you mind?��


    Eri left my room and I started preparing myself. After I finished preparing, the two of us head towards the Guild Building.


    On the way towards the guild building, we passed towards different kinds of people. Different Ages, Gender and Races all cohabitate in a single town. Usually, in most of the fantasy novels that I read, there are discrimination towards different races, mostly the Beastmen. But looking at the diversity of people in here, you can definitely see how different races view each other, Equal and with respect to one another. Because of that, this can be described certainly as a peaceful one. And in a world, that��s full of picturesque sceneries, a peaceful town with cohabitating races is all that I can ask. Even I don��t want to ruin this picturesque world with bloodshed, you know. But I highly doubt that my partner feels the same.


    ��Hey Eri, I was just wandering�� What are your thoughts about this world?��


    ��What��s with you?��


    ��Just answer my question.��


    ��Well, I��ll admit that this world is beautiful�� But human still needs to be remove out of the picture. It��ll be perfect after that.��


    See! That��s what I��m saying. I can��t let this Demon indiscriminately kill other humans.


    ��Maybe I��ll need to put a leash on you.��


    ��Don��t you dare!��


    ��Oh, am I perhaps thinking out loud?��


    ��Yes, you are. And don��t you dare do that to me. I��ll kill you if you do that to me.��


    ��Okay, okay. Chill. That��s just me thinking. I won��t put a leash on you or whatever. But don��t do anything stupid like killing a person or�� Committing a Massacre.��


    ��I won��t do that! What kind of image do I have in your mind?��


    ��Umm�� Someone that will kill a human if she were left behind?��


    ��I admit that I might do that. But still, I will not just to that indiscriminately. Don��t worry, the only people that I��m going to kill are those that is involved in killing my mother and contributing to my suffering.��


    ��Am I, perhaps, in your list too?��


    ��Hmm�� Who knows? And why are you asking me that? You know that I won��t be able kill you, right?��


    ��Yes, that��s true�� But still, having a comrade stab you in the back is just�� a sad thing to experience.��


    ��If that��s the case, then you don��t have to worry about it. Not yet����


    ��Hey! What��s the meaning of that!��


    I chased after her when she said that. And with that, we reached the Guild Building.


    <hr>


    ��Hey, Izuna, were here. Apparently, Eri is really excited about registering to the Guild.��


    ��I��m not!��


    ��Oh, Hans, Eri. Please wait a minute, I��ll just finish this appointment. I��ll join you later.��


    Eri and I sat on the table near the counter and waited for Izuna to finish her appointment. After she��s done, she went towards us.


    ��Hans, Eri, Are you two ready?��


    ��Of course! And Eri seems to be overly enthusia�C��


    I was interrupted with a hand chop in the head.


    ��How many times do I need to tell you to stop with that description every time a guild activity came up.��


    ��Hahaha, sorry about that�� It��s just so fun teasing you.��


    ��You really are trying to get yourself killed, are you?��


    ��Cut it out! You two better not start a fight in here. I don��t know what will happen to the Guild Building if the two of you were to fight seriously.��


    ��Don��t worry about that, Izuna. I��ll be sure to end it with a single strike to reduce the damage to the property.��


    ��Oho�� So, you��re implying that I��ll lose?��


    ��Well, have you won against me before?��


    ��I��ll win this time, for sure!��


    ��I wonder about that.��


    ��Stop it now, will you. We have a lot to do today so can we just go start?��


    ��Ok. We��ll resume it later.��


    ��Agreed.��


    ��Ok. Now that we are all calmed down, let��s now start your examinations. Follow Me.��


    We followed Izuna towards a room at the back of the guild with a crystal ball in the center.


    ��Hey, are we going to do fortune telling or what?��


    ��I don��t know why you associate the situation we are currently in right now to a fortune telling, but I assure you, this has nothing to do with it. The crystal is a tool to determine your overall strength and magic power. This��ll be used as a basis to determine your rank and level.��


    ��Oh, okay.��


    ��So, who will be the first?��


    ��I think it��s really fair to let Eri be the first one because she��s so exci�C��


    ��One more word and you��re dead.��


    ��Ah�� Nevermind.��


    ��Ok then. Eri, put your hands in the crystal.��


    Eri put her hands to the crystal. After a few seconds delay, the crystal ball began glowing dimly. What shone in the crystal are Dark Violet and Black, and the colors are really clear.


    ��As expected of a Demon General.��


    ��What did it say?��


    ��Well, the crystal determined that you have a high affinity on lightning and Dark Magic. And the Magic strength is not to be trifled with. You really are so powerful, Eri. And your level is�� Oh! You��re in the 300��s! Only a handful of Adventurers had made it past the 300-level mark! Besides the Legendary Heroes, there are only 13 other Adventurers that made it past 300. I should be surprised by now but the fact that she��s a Demon King General make it so anti-climactic.��


    ��So? What exactly is my level?��


    ��You��re level 312. That qualifies you to the Rank A status!��


    ��Only A? I think that my stats qualify me to become S-Rank.��


    ��While it��s true that your rank is certainly higher than a normal adventurer, it can��t be compared to those that belong to Rank S. The weakest person that poses Rank S Title is at level 423. Meanwhile, The Demon King is believed to have reached passed the 500-level mark. By the way, a normal adventurer usually caps towards level 200. That is the reason why the range of the level between Rank A and Rank S is significantly large compared to the other level. You can become a Rank A Adventurer when you reach level 100, but you need to reach level 400 to become Rank S.��This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere.


    ��I feel like there��s so much information being dumped in my face just now. So basically, I��m really strong, right?��


    ��Yes, you��re strong. Not as strong as the Demon King and the Legendary Heroes but you��re still stronger than most of the adventurers.��


    Eri looked so proud right now, looks like she��s trying to mock me by showing me her smug face.


    ��You really are a sore loser.,Eri. You don��t need to show your smug face to me right now. I��m still technically more powerful than you, you know?��


    Eri just walked pass me and shrugged.


    ��Well, now that Eri��s done, shall we proceed to you, Hans?��


    ��Sure!��


    I went towards the crystal ball and put my hands on it.


    Suddenly, the crystal ball emitted a very bright light filled with colors of the spectrum, enough to make the room look like some kind of ethereal Disco Party Room.


    I looked at Izuna and what I saw in her face is sheer amazement. If I were to recall what Izuna said earlier, our strength and magical power is determined by how bright the crystal shone. And if I were to use what Izuna said about the color of the crystal when Eri touched it, I can conclude that I am able to use all types of magic. Looks like I have become a more bugged character than what I am right now.


    Eri looked at me with amazed expression as well. Looks like even her can��t deny how awesome I really am. I looked at the crystal and I saw a number in it, 9999 to be exact. Izuna looked like she can��t believe what she��s looking right now. She looked at the Crystal and became more stiffed than usual.


    ��Your level�� It��s over 9000!��


    Izuna��s still trying to process what she��s seeing while Eri has her Palm on her face. She then looked at me.


    ��I know that you are strong. But to be as strong as this, you��re pretty much a God, you know. I feel sorry for my fellow comrades and the Demon King for trying to fight with this absurd monstrous individual.��


    ��I am surprised too, you know! I know that I am really strong�� But to have a result like this?! I don��t even know what to feel right now.��


    I removed my hand on the Crystal Ball and the light instantly disappears. What I saw in the side of the Crystal Ball��s stand is Izuna lumping in the floor while murmuring something.


    ��This is unbelievable, it can��t be true. Yep, that��s right, it��s just a Dream. Definitely a dream. There��s no way a human can become that strong. Yep, it��s just a Dream. I��ll just pinch myself to wake up.��


    Izuna pinched herself only to feel the pain of the pinch.


    ��Ouch! That hurts�� Wait, I��m still here. So, everything is true?��


    ��Yes, it��s true as it can be. I don��t know what happened to myself, but apparently, I am a really powerful being.��


    Izuna rushed in front of me and started shaking me.


    ��Why are you being so calm about this! You currently are the strongest being in this entire world right now, you know?! In fact, I don��t even know if the gods can handle you. You��re a Rank X Being, and I��m really relieved that you are on humanity��s side. I don��t even know what would happen if you were to become our enemy. We might as well prepare ourselves for a one-sided annihilation.��


    ��You��re overexaggerating.��


    ��No I��m not. I really need to report this to the higher ups. They need to know about you, Hans.��


    ��Please don��t.��


    ��Why not, you will be recognized everywhere as a new Legendary Hero.��


    ��I don��t care about that. We just want to travel, to go on an adventure. That��s what we are going to do after this. And a unnecessary title would be a pain in the ass.��


    Izuna calmed herself down and then start speaking.


    ��I understand. I��ll prepare your Guild Cards so you can start your adventure today. And also, I have a favor to ask.��


    ��What is it?��


    ��If we were in need of help, can you come to our aid?��


    I looked at Eri who is known to hate Human. But right now, she��s just averting her gaze. Looks like she was trying to say that she can��t do anything since I��ve already made up my mind to do it. I looked at Izuna again and gave her a reply.


    ��Sure! Anytime you need us, just call us.��


    ��Thank You, Hans.��


    Izuna leaped towards me and as I catch her, she wrapped her arms around me and hugged me. After a few second, she separated from me.


    ��Once Again, Thank You.��


    After that ruckus, we went back to the Guild Building and Wait for our Guild Cards. After receiving it, we said our goodbyes to Izuna and started our journey without any destinations. After all, the purpose of this journey is to be strong.


    ��And now, at last, Our Journey Begins.��


    ��Or so I thought.


    It would��ve been awesome if that were to happen. But reality is harsh and its portrayal of your dreams were far more boring, and flat-out bland.


    <hr>


    This is what really happened.


    I put my hands in the crystal and it didn��t light up.


    Even as we waited for a few seconds, the Crystal doesn��t seem to be glowing soon.


    ��Huh? It seems that it wasn��t responding to you. Looks like the crystal broke. But it��s still working a minute ago.��


    ��What��s the matter?��


    ��The crystal is not emitting any reactions with your touch.��


    ��Is it broken?��


    ��I don��t know. It appears to be functioning properly when Eri touched it.��


    Izuna touch the crystal to see if it is functioning. The crystal shone Green color with a slight touch of Blue. A number ��74�� appeared inside the crystal.


    ��The crystal is not broken. Can you try touching the crystal again, Hans?��


    ��Sure.��


    I touched the crystal and still, there seems to be no response whatsoever. Izuna is being confused right now, Eri, on the other hand appears to have no care.


    Suddenly, a number appeared inside the crystal. Izuna and Eri saw the number and both of them was even more confused.


    The number that appeared is ��1��.


    ��This can��t be true.��


    Eri looked at me with confusion in her eyes. Looks like even she can��t comprehend the current situation.


    Suddenly, I remembered what the old geezer said to me.


    ��One of the limitations that comes with the ability I gave you is you would stay on level 1. It is not because you are broken. It is because the level reading mechanism in our world would not identify your ability, add to that the fact that you won��t be able to use the magic that exist in my world. Because of that, the readings will stay level 1. You will be treated badly because of your status.�� Is what he said.


    I sighed.


    ��I knew it. So this is what the old geezer meant, huh?��


    Eri approached me.


    ��What��s the meaning of this?��


    ��As you can see, looks like I am just level 1 and has no affinity for magic.��


    Izuna was still confused on what I just said.


    ��Wait. My mind��s still trying to process what just happened. So, you really are just a normal person?��


    ��If you look at what my stats is, you can say that I��m undoubtedly a normal person.��


    ��But how come you defeated the Demon King?��


    ��Because I��m strong?��


    Izuna paused for a moment then she looked straight to me.


    ��So that��s what it is.��


    ��Huh?��


    ��You��re just lying to me the whole time.��


    ��Huh?!��


    ��Eri is certainly powerful, but you, on the other hand, is just a normal being.��


    ��So, what are you trying to imply?��


    ��I��m trying to say that you are a shameless fraud that takes advantage of your partner��s strength.��


    Izuna looked more serious now.


    ��I��m not a fraud. And I truly defeated the Demon King by myself.��


    ��I won��t believe you unless you have a proof. Until then, I will not allow you to register to this guild. Forget about the promise, It��s bullshit anyway.��


    Eri came near me and look at Izuna.


    ��If I were you, Izuna, I would stop judging Hans based on what that crystal said.��


    ��Eri, are you being forced by him to tell lies?��


    Eri appeared a little pissed off.


    ��Do you think that I will accompany a human, let alone a weak one, just because he paid me? Don��t underestimate my resolve, Human. Even if you are Izuna, I will never hold back if you insult my resolve.��


    Eri looks like she��s going to strike Izuna at any moment. I need to stop this.


    ��Both of you, stop! I understand each of your sides. Eri doesn��t want her resolve getting trampled. On the other hand, Izuna thinks that I��m lying. So how about we have an unofficial duel. You and me.��


    Izuna swiftly replied.


    ��Sure. If I can expose your lies with that, then I certainly will agree with your idea. If you win, I will let you join the Guild and I will be your personal contact in the guild. If you lose, I will make sure to prevent you from getting a guild card everywhere.��


    ��Hans, just do it moderately.��


    ��Don��t worry, it��ll be over in a flash.��


    ��Now you��re just underestimating me.��


    ��Don��t worry. Hans will never underestimate someone. Unless the person is a true trash.��


    ��You seemed to highly value Hans�� skill, huh.��


    ��I just stated the obvious. Besides, if he won, it will not be as thrilling as it should be.��


    Izuna looked at me.


    ��So, shall we begin?��


    ��Okay.��


    ��But let��s not do it in a cramped space. There is a large plain in the outskirts of the town., We can conduct the duel here, and no one will be bothered.��


    ��Do what you want.��


    We went towards the outskirts of the town and found really beautiful plains stretched towards the horizon.


    ��This��ll be the right spot.��


    ��So��What are we going to do now?��


    ��Eri will act as our mediator. No fatal attacks shall be used.��


    ��Let��s just get this over with.��


    ��I couldn��t wait any longer��


    After saying that, Izuna suddenly appeared in front of me and tried to stab me. Looks like she��s really serious now. I can feel her bloodlust overflowing. The person in front of me is very different to the Izuna that I know.


    Izuna is really fast. Even though I managed to dodge every strike, she��s still not losing her speed. I managed to escape her strike zone after I pushed her and thrown her balance off.


    ��You��re really fast.��


    ��Thank you. But that is to be expected if you were to fight a Wind Magic User.��


    ��That��s what I thought. So, green means Wind. Then I assume that you can also use Water Magic, am I right?��


    ��Yes, although not as adept as the ones who mainly use it�� Why am I even telling you this, I��m here to fight you, not to talk to you.��


    ��You��re the one who answered my questions, why blame the talk on me?��


    ��Because you asked a question on the first place!��


    ��You could��ve just ignore it.��


    ��Aaah! Just focus on the duel!��


    Izuna once again dashed towards me. But this time, I am not trying to avoid it.


    I caught the blade that Izuna��s swinging in my hand. It took her several seconds to understand what had just happened. But after she processed the current scene, she looked surprised about it.


    ��Wha-!��


    ��Now, now. Just take it easy. I��m not even at my full strength yet.��


    ��How!��


    ��Because I��m strong, I said that already, right?��


    I released the knife from my grasp and took a few steps backwards.


    ��Now, Izuna, let me demonstrate what my real strength is.��


    I started dashing randomly in the field. It seems that I was so fast that even a Wind Magic User couldn��t catch up with me. Izuna tried to get hold of me but she couldn��t. Meanwhile, I��m just poking her whenever I see her blind spot, and it seems to be working. Izuna is getting irritated because of the continuous poking.


    ��Stop it! Take it seriously, you Dumbass.��


    ��Okay, sure.��


    I stopped in front of her while smiling.


    ��What do you think you��re doing?��


    ��I��m showing you my strength.��


    ��You��re just making me a fool!��


    ��But you told me to-��


    ��Take this seriously!��


    ��But if I do that-��


    ��You better not pull any stunts like that again. Here, I am trying my best to defeat you, and you are just toying with me. That��s really insulting!��


    I kind of understand what she��s feeling the more I think about it. Why? Because it happens to me all the time.


    <hr>


    I always felt inferior to Mira and Eric. I don��t know how it started, the only thing I know is that I��ve felt more and more inferior to the two of them as the time goes by. They are athletic, crowd-pleaser and more importantly, loved by everyone. I��m not jealous, I��m just disheartened by the fact that they are loved by everyone and my love for them is but a little piece in the puzzle. Me on the other hand is a loner who only talks to his classmates when necessary. Only has 2 friends and nothing more. Every time the three of us walks home, there will be instances that they will be called out by their friends and I would be left hanging. That��s insulting, but I have no rights to stop them. That��s why I understand Izuna. The more I make fun of her while she��s working hard, the more it becomes insulting. Just like when Mira and Eric inadvertently show me how having friends is easy, the more it felt more insulting to me because I can��t do it.


    <hr>


    ��Are you sure?��


    ��What happened, you��re dead serious all of the sudden.��


    ��I��m sorry for being a douche earlier. Don��t worry, from now on I��m going to face you seriously.��


    ��That��s more like it!��


    I heightened up my senses to be able to detect everything that��s happening around me. I focused my eyes to Izuna alone. Right now, she��s the Enemy, not a Friend.


    I Imagine the exact sword that I used to defeat the Demon King��s Generals. A Wakizashi with Gold-squared guard. I held it on my left hand and walk straight to Izuna, not averting my gaze from her.


    ��Wait, what��s happening? What��s with this devilish atmosphere?!��


    I stare directly at Izuna, never averting my gaze, and when I reached a certain distance between us, I stopped.


    ��W-wait! This is not going to end well for me. Please, I surrender! I��m not going to-��


    She stopped speaking when she noticed that I am at her back while the blade on my left hand was pointed at her neck. She was shocked and looked pale.


    ��You��re my Enemy right now. I will not hesitate to destroy those that tries to disrupt me and my plans.��


    Eri walked towards me and pat my back.


    ��You better stop it now. You��re taking this too far.��


    I let go of Izuna and she slumped in the floor.


    ��Ah, looks like I took it too far. I apologize, I just don��t want to insult her.��


    ��Don��t apologize to me. Apologize to her.��


    ��Uhm�� Izuna, I apologize for taking it too far.��


    She didn��t reply.


    ��Oh looks like she lost her consciousness. Are you perhaps a Demon pretending to be human?��


    ��Ha ha ha. Nice Joke Eri.��


    I sighed.


    I lifted Izuna and carried her on my back and we return to the Guild Building and lay her in a sofa in the rooms at the back of the guild.


    Izuna woke up with jumbled memories about what happened. After Eri told her what happened, she inadvertently tried to distance herself from me, but since the room is small, she couldn��t really do it. We let her rest while we made up some excuse for her supervisor.


    While Izuna is sleeping, Eri and I went to the marketplace to buy essential items for our travel like: medicines, Items for personal hygiene, mats for outdoor sleeping etc.


    After shopping for supplies we head back to the Guild Building only to saw Izuna on the counter. When she saw us, she waved her hands and called out to us. After we reached the counter, Izuna pulled something under it and gave it to us.


    ��There you go.��


    ��What is this?��


    ��That��s your Guild Card. That card has many functionalities. You can use it as identification when entering a new town, A way to store your gold in our vault, Monitoring your leveling status and more.��


    ��Nice! Now, we can start our adventures properly!��


    ��Yes, let��s go now.��


    ��Wait! Before you go, I just want to say�� Thank You. Thank you for trusting me. I promise I won��t break it, no matter what happened.��


    ��Good, Thanks for understanding our situation.��


    ��Now go! I wish you both good luck with your travels and exploits. Visit me if you have time.��


    ��Sure! But you��ll never know when. In that way, it��ll be exciting.��


    ��Hahaha, just go.��


    After we said our goodbyes, Eri and I went towards the Town Entrance.


    ��Eri, this is it.��


    ��Yes.��


    ��This is the start of our adventures, Eri!��


    ��And I��m going to get stronger!��


    ��Yeah, we will both become stronger.��


    After a brief exchange, we took our first step towards our new adventures. New people to meet, new things to see, new experiences to feel. I look forward to all of this.


    ��Hans!!!��


    Or so I thought


    ��Hans!!!��


    Eri and I stopped and looked at the source of the voice. It was Izuna who��s running towards us.


    ��Hans! Sorry to bother you, but we need help.��


    ��For what?��


    ��A huge Demon Force is heading towards this town. We can��t defend ourselves alone if that happens.��


    And��


    ��We are going to be killed at them.��


    There��


    ��We need your help!��


    Goes��


    ��Please, Hans, Eri.��


    Our��


    ��We beg you!��


    Adventures��


    ��Please! Help us save this town!��


    Yup. There goes our Adventures.

 Chapter 8 – The Emergency Meeting… And A Totally Irrelevant Characters Revenge

    ��Please! Help us save this town!��


    And here I thought that we can now properly start our own journey, a new fricking event suddenly popped out. The timing is really bad.


    ��Huh?!��


    ��Like what I said, A huge Demon Force is heading towards this town. We are in need of your help to stop them.��


    ��Can you please just stop for a minute? The events are just randomly popping out that I have no time to catch up. Whatd��ya say? An invasion by the Demon Army?��


    ��Yes!��


    ��You certainly came to the wrong people to ask for help.��


    ��But why?! You two are really strong, right?��


    ��Let��s first go to some place quiet. You wouldn��t want the crowd to hear about that certain thing that can kill them all, wouldn��t you?��


    Izuna looked around her and saw curious bystanders eavesdropping to our conversation.


    ��Yea, we probably should.��


    We went towards a caf�� near the gates of the town. The caf�� has few people in it which is good if were going to discuss about something that can potentially slaughter them all.


    After ordering, Izuna went back to the topic at hand.


    ��Why can��t the two of you aide us on fighting the Demon Force?!��


    ��Ok, first of all, can you just call it Demon Army? Demon Force is misleading, like some kind of inexplainable power that can control things and control people�� But I assume that you do not know that so�� Just use Demon Army. Second, Eri and I will be the most unsuited to deal with that army.��


    ��But Why?!��


    ��You still couldn��t get it? Eri is a former Demon General, you know? And I, on the other hand will not be allowed by this town��s higher ups to know about the upcoming attack, let alone join the battle, because in paper, I am just a level 1 adventurer.��


    ��You have a point. But still����


    Izuna seems like she��s trying to find a reason for us to participate, but then her shoulders dropped, gesturing that she couldn��t find it.


    ��You understand it now, Izuna? It��s pointless to ask us.��


    ��Yes.��


    She answered regretfully.


    ��If you have no questions, we��ll excuse ourselves.��


    ��Right�� I apologize for stopping both of you. Thanks for at least listening to me.��


    She sounded disheartened.


    We called waiter, or whatever you call them in this world, and paid our orders. After that, we stood and head towards the exit. But before I could walk farther from our table, Izuna��s hands pulled me in the hem of my shirt. When I looked at her, she looks like she was about to cry while looking at me.


    ��Izuna?��


    Izuna seems to have realized what she had done subconsciously and pulled her hand out immediately.


    ��I-I��m sorry about that. I did not mean to stop you, it��s just�� I��m sorry. Aah, silly me! Why did I do that.��


    ��Now I can��t just refuse you. Not when you are showing that kind of face to me.��


    Izuna looks like she��s trying to be tough while she��s wiping the tears slowly falling in her eyes. And that is something that I can��t just ignore.


    ��Huh?��


    ��Just like what you heard, we��re going to help you.��


    ��Really?!��


    ��Yes. But first, I want you to answer me truthfully.��


    ��What is it?��


    ��Do you love this town?��


    Without hesitation, she answered wholeheartedly: ��Yes!��


    ��Good. That��s enough for me. I��ll help you.��


    ��Really! Thank you very much! I��m sure that Lord Mereid will-��


    ��Wait, Izuna. You seems to be misunderstanding something. I will help you not to gain the approval of this town��s Lord. I am helping you because you said that you love this town. I am helping you to further your trust in us.��


    Izuna was out of words for a second. Then held my hand.


    ��Thank you very much! Thank you!��


    ��Don��t mention it. I��ll help, but I don��t know about Eri.��


    ��The Demon King is already dead so I have no obligation to protect those demons. I��ll help you, Hans.��


    ��That��s great to hear! Now, what do we do next?��


    ��Good thing you asked. There is currently an emergency meeting being held in the conference room of the guild. The Guild Master, The Head of the Oreius Knights and the Lord of this town are in there, together with some leaders of high level adventurer parties. We need to go there immediately!��


    ��Wait wait wait, that is something that I can��t handle. C��mon Izuna, you��re telling me to go and meet those higher ups immediately? I will be bombarded with insult if I were to go there!��


    ��Don��t worry, they are all reasonable.��


    ��But still, those are very important people, I have no rights to meet them!��


    ��You have! You��re the only one who can save the town from the attack!��


    ��Can I just leave the whole ��talking to important persons�� to you, Izuna?��


    ��No way, I have no rights to meet them.��


    ��That��s what I��m saying! You��re telling me to go somewhere important even if I��m not invited. I will be executed if something happened there and it��s my fault.��


    ��But that is the only way to make them let you join the defending group. You need to show them that you��re capable.��


    ��What a drag. We��ll just be a laughingstock there, you know. I certainly said that I would help but I don��t want to deal with those higher than me, it��s just hard to get through someone who feels that they��re superior than you.��


    ��I know, but you still need to go. Don��t worry, I��ll accompany you.��


    ��You don��t have the rights to meet the, right?��


    ��it will all work out, eventually.��


    ��That��s not reassuring, you know.��


    ��Don��t sweat it.��


    And with that, I��m being pulled towards the guild building where the meeting is currently being held.


    <hr>


    Right now, were in the door that leads to the conference room. And if you��re asking why we��re not going in yet, it is because on the other side of the door, a heated argument is currently happening.


    ��We need to evacuate the city right away! The people should be the first priority.��


    ��No! We should take our stand in here! We will not let those Demons destroy our hometown!��


    ��But that will be suicide! The Demon Army is huge. Even if all the powerful adventurers in this town were to gather, we would barely last the attack. Many will die, you know that?!��


    ��It is worth to sacrifice someone for the well-being of the majority!��


    ��But it will be foolish if there is an obvious way other than sacrifice that we should��ve taken.��


    ��You��re a coward, Knight! Just hide somewhere, we��ll handle the attack.��


    ��You, adventurers, are big fools! You will just sacrifice yourselves for nothing!��


    ��Enough! We can��t reach a definitive conclusion if you two were to argue without coming up with something productive. I get your point Moris, you just want to protect this town where you were born and raise, on the other hand, Altus has a point too. The well-being of the citizens should be the top priority. You two have a point, but we need to reach a conclusion that will save the citizens while preventing any casualties and damage to the town itself. I know that what I��m saying is practically impossible, but we still need to grasp even a slightest possibility that it can be executed. I know that I am selfish, but I love this town, I love my people.��


    With that speech, the two arguing persons stopped talking.


    <hr>


    On the other side of the door��


    ��Should we enter now? The commotion appears to be subdued.��


    ��I think we should. But I don��t know how to react after I entered the room.��


    ��Just be relaxed.��


    ��That won��t work. Especially right now that my nerves are cracking just by thinking that I would interact with a higher up.��


    ��Then how?��


    I need to think abiot it. I need to leave an impression that I can do anything, not just a wimp whose afraid of talking to high-positioned people.


    ��I know, I��ll just act like an arrogant overconfident jerk!��


    ��That would be weird if I think about it. But if that��s what would make you less nervous, then so be it.��


    ��Ok then, I��ll enter.��


    <hr>


    ��-I am selfish, but I love this town, I love my people.��


    ��Then let me assist you! Lord Mereid.��


    Right after I entered the room, everyone inside became wary and their weapons were drawn and pointed towards me.


    ��Who are you!��


    The Knight whose named is Altus, if I��m listening right, was the one who broke the dreadful atmosphere and asks the question.


    ��No need to know me. After all, I��m just here to assist with the crisis at hand.��


    ��So, you��re not an enemy. But still, you��re being disrespectful of the Lord by entering the room even if you shouldn��t be here.��


    ��I know. But this is not the time for that. I��m sorry, Lord Mereid, but the crisis at hands should be the utmost priority.��


    ��Let him in. Looks like he has a plan.��If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it.


    They let me in together with Eri. Izuna was gone when I looked outside, she seems to avoid being seen by the people inside.


    As I walk towards the seat that they offered, I��ve bumped to a table and the silverwares fell in the ground. I tried to pick them up but I ended up bumping my head under the table. There goes my ��tough�� acting��


    ��You look like a fool.��


    ��Shut up, Eri.��


    We went towards the seat that was offered to us. Everyone looked at us without saying something, kind of like they were evaluating our strengths by looking at us physically.


    There are currently 8 people in the room right now, including us. Lord Mereid, The Head of the Knight Altus, the leader of a High-Rank Party Moris, The Guild Master whom I don��t know and is quiet, and the other 2 leaders of the other High-Rank Parties.


    The one who broke the silence was Lord Mereid himself.


    ��Before we can trust you, we need to know the both of you first. Can you show us your Guild Card?��


    ��Eri, show yours to them.��


    Eri pulled out her guild card from her pocket and hand it over to Lord Mereid and he hand it over to the guild master to analyze.


    The guild master looked calm and collected, but as he saw what��s Eri��s status is in the card, He looked surprised and amused.


    ��Now that��s what I call a shocker.��


    ��What did it say?��


    ��The Girl��s level is 312.��


    ��312?!��


    The one that reacted like that is the other High-Rank Party leader that looks young and arrogant.


    ��I��m not joking. And by the way, little girl. I will tell you a little secret. You��re not the only one who has passed the 300��s in this room.��


    As soon as he said that, Eri became wary of the Guild Master. I can tell that her hands were already holding her knives right now.


    I patted her shoulder while signaling her to stop making commotion.


    ��Is it perhaps you, sir?��


    ��Hahaha! You have a good intuition there, Boy! Name��s Derekar, just call me Derek.��


    ��Ok, sir Derek. Are we clear now?��


    ��Oh, Boy. Not yet. Yes, your partner definitely has the power. But do you have it? Let me see your card too.��


    ��No need. I��ll tell you what my level is.��


    ��Good, less work for me.��


    ��I��m level 1.��


    The room fell silent once again, as if anticipating a different answer. The one who reacted first was Derek.


    ��Are you sure, Boy?��


    ��Yes. I am level 1.��


    ��You�� You seriously think that we��ll let you join here. Given your level is 1?��


    The one who reacted was Moris.


    ��I don��t really care.��


    ��Hey! That��s not the way to answer Moris. You��re being disrespectful!�� The other High-Rank Party leader blurted.


    ��I��m not talking to you. Who are you, anyway.��


    ��I am William. And I will not let you disrespect me too. You��re just a level 1, a weakling! What makes you think that you��re superior to me and you can just ignore me and disrespect me?��


    ��I don��t really care about you. I am talking to Moris, you see.��


    ��You know, I can kill you right here, right now.��


    ��Try it.��


    ��Stop it Will!��


    ��But Moris, he��s being disrespectful on us, when it��s clear that we��re Ranked Higher than him. On that note, why is a strong and beautiful girl like you partnering up with that weakling? If you were being paid to, Then I can raise your pay if you will join my party. If you were being forced, then I will make sure to make him release you-��


    Will focused her lecherous eyes towards Eri, even though she��s wearing a cloak.


    So that��s what he wants.


    ��-Come on, you really want to come with me now instead of that weakling, right?��


    I can feel Eri��s blood boiling right now. I can relate to her, however. I want to punch that guy in the face too. But we can��t afford to do that yet so I signaled her to calm down.


    ��Looks like she doesn��t want to. Give up.��


    ��Ok that��s it, fucker! I will kill you right now and here! You weakling who can��t identify someone stronger than you! I will teach you a lesson, a really painful lesson. You, weak fucker, should just lower your head when I told you so, die when I want to! Weak should obey the strong! You degenerate motherfucker! Just cower while I punish you thoroughly. You weak, lame degenerate, idiot excuse for a-��


    ��I think you should stop talking now.��


    ��Huh?! Are you getting chills in your spine now, you weak and lowly excuse of a man?��


    ��Any further than that and your head will separate your body.��


    ��What are you-��


    Even before he finishes what he��s saying, he noticed that there is a knife pointed in his throat. That��s why he stopped talking. The other members of the meeting were also surprised about what just happened and had no time to react at all.


    Eri was not in her seat now. She was at Will��s back, holding a knife pointed to Will��s throat.


    I then stood up, put my hands to the table and lean on it. I then released my bloodlust to the room.


    ��Look, I am not asking for permission to join. I��m just informing all of you that I will join and I don��t need your permission for it.��


    All of them looked like they are feeling the pressure of my bloodlust. All of them besides Derek, the Guild Master.


    After a brief silence, The Guild Master break it.


    ��Do what you want, Boy. You don��t need permission from us anyways. You know what, I doubt you because of your level. But after you released your bloodlust, I knew that you are not just bluffing. I can feel that you are hiding something and I won��t pry to it anymore. Just join us whenever you wanted. If you can help us with the current problem at hand, then that will be reassuring.��


    I stopped my bloodlust and the pressure was gone from the air. Eri went beside me.


    ��Now then, we��ll go now. Good luck with the rest of your meeting. And I would strongly recommend not to get on our way. Once again, thank you for your time.��


    We then walked out of the room. While walking, you can still hear them saying things like ��Are you sure about that?�� or ��Is it the right choice?�� Nothing matters anyway. We will still save this town in the fastest way possible and immediately resume our journey.


    As I look back inside the room, I saw the people inside still arguing. Amidst that, I saw William glaring at me while clenching his fist, and I have a bad feeling about it.


    <hr>


    ��What happened there? Is everything fine? Did they agree to let you join?��


    ��Can you please shut up for a minute, Izuna? My head hurts right now and silence would help me a lot.��


    We are now in one of the Guild��s Resting Rooms. As soon as we exited the room, Izuna greeted us. I really wanted to flick her in the forehead, but I��m too drained for that. Therefore, Izuna offered us a Guild Room to rest. But instead of being able to rest, we are bombarded by Izuna��s questions.


    ��C��mon, don��t be stingy. What happened there?��


    ��Eri, is it okay if you would tell to that girl right there about what happened inside the room?��


    ��Sure!��


    ��Yes! What happened there, Eri?��


    ��Hans embarrassed himself in front of them.��


    ��Let��s just forget about that, Eri.��


    ��If you just saw what happened to him, you will find yourself laughing too.��


    ��You don��t need to tell her about that, right?��


    ��So? What really happened there?��


    ��Well, he never shown respect to the people there and a fight almost happened. As expected of Hans.��


    ��What did you do, Hans.��


    ��That��s Broad! See, even Izuna misinterpreted that. You suck at telling stories, Eri. I��ll just tell the story myself. This is what happened:��


    I told her the whole story from the start until the moment I exited the room, but I didn��t tell her about William and his glare.


    ��I��m not even surprised anymore. But still, why did you provoke William? Is that a part of your plan?��


    ��Nah, he just pissed me off.��


    ��I knew it.��


    ��I can��t help it. He��s being a jerk. He should be glad that a fight was prevented. If not, he would probably have a few broken bones by now.��


    ��I know that you��re just joking, but I have a feeling that you would go to those lengths if you��re pissed off.��


    ��No! I��m not joking. I swear to God, if he were to act like a douche in front of me, I��ll straight up punch him in the face.��


    ��If you do that, you will face the wrath of almost all the Girls in this town. Even if he��s a jerk, he��s certainly popular with girls, you know.��


    ��Oh, so that��s why he��s confident that Eri would join her. What does he think of himself, a sex icon? His kind is the kind of person that I hate the most! Those who thinks they are so handsome and all the girls should, compulsorily, flock to him whenever he go somewhere. Aaah!!! He��s pissing me off! I want to punch him so badly. C��mon, can I punch him just once?��


    ����Umm.��


    Before I realized it, I was already standing while my fist was raised. I immediately sat afterwards.


    ��Um, Sorry about that. Don��t mind me.��


    ��Okay�� So? What are you going to do now? Will you prepare for the battle?��


    ��No, we��ll head to the inn that we stayed at. We need some rest considering the events that happened today were tiring.��


    ��You will not prepare?��


    ��Do you see us as the type of people that prepares for something?��


    ��Now that I think about it, No, prepping��s not suited for the both of you.��


    ��See! Well, we��ll excuse ourselves for the night. Let��s meet again tomorrow.��


    ��Ok, see you tomorrow.��


    Eri and I went back to the Wolf��s Inn where we first stayed. Since we��ve already checked out, we need to check in again on the counter. We went towards the counter and we were greeted by the counter lady.


    ��Oh, you two again. I thought you two would head out today, why the change of heart?��


    ��Well, a certain energetic girl asked me for help with something, so we postponed our trip just to help her.��


    ��Oh, how nice of you! Well, enjoy your stay. Just tell me if you need anything.��


    ��Sure.��


    After the counter lady send us off, we Eri and I went to our rooms. It��s been a long day so a good night sleep is definitely what I need right now. But before I do, I need to attend to something important first.


    After confirming that Eri is asleep, I went outside and walked towards the Town Plaza.


    ��You can come out now.��


    What came out are 6 Guys brandishing their weapons.


    ��Oh, so you noticed us.��


    ��Yeah. All of you are bad at tailing people, you know. I noticed right after I left the Guild Building.��


    ��So you noticed us and you still decided to go in somewhere deserted? You��re foolish!��


    ��Yeah, yeah. Enough of the Chit chat. Tell me what you want.��


    ��We don��t want anything from you. But our boss does.��


    ��Boss?��


    ��Hey there, Fucker.��


    What emerged in the darkness of the night is William, holding a sword and brandishing it.


    ��Um, should I say�� ��As expected��?��


    ��Huh?��


    ��Well, you looked like you want to kill me earlier so if someone��s wanting to follow me and look for the opportunity to attack, then it must be you.��


    ��You��re smart, I��ll give you that. But still, you cannot escape this situation. And you didn��t bring that girl with you so this will be rather easy, it will be a shame for me to do it to someone as weak as you.��


    ��Then, why not ��not�� do it?��


    ��Huh? Are you an idiot? You��ve embarrassed me earlier so you need to pay. Unfortunately, you will need to die here.��


    ��Are you sure with that?��


    ��You think you can change my mind? Sorry but I will kill you regardless of your reasons.��


    ��So that��s your final answer.��


    William then instructed the 6 goons to attack me.


    Suddenly, they became hesitant to come near me because of what appeared in my hands.


    ��He��s a mage?!��


    ��He has a wand.��


    ��Don��t worry, he��s still at level 1 so he can��t hurt you all.��


    Is what I was hearing around me.


    What appeared in my hand is apump-actionshotgun. Loaded with rubber bullets so it would not be fatal if hit.


    ��This is not a wand, this is my own weapon, a shotgun, and I��m going to defeat all of you by just using this.��


    The goons appeared to be hesitant to move because of their unfamiliarity to the weapon I am holding. What pushed them to attack is William who��s still just watching.


    ��What are you standing around for?! Attack the guy!��


    The goons attacked simultaneously. But unfortunately for them, I already have my weapon so it is pretty much a win for me.


    I aimed the muzzle to one of the goons and pulled the trigger. The bullet sent the goon aback and writhing in pain.


    ��Now, let��s get this party started.��


    I unloaded the bullets towards the goons around me while maniacally laughing. The goons were writhing in pain every time they get hit by the bullets. Some tried to escape but were shot immediately. Even if they��re already down, I still unload all of my bullets in them causing them to have bruises all over their body and losing consciousness.


    After having my share of fun, I looked towards where William is standing. He��s shocked at what he saw earlier and couldn��t grasp the situation.


    I dashed towards him and stop right before I collide with him.


    ��You��re next.��


    After hearing those words, William frantically shouts for help.


    ��Remember when you said you��d kill me? You have so much conviction in that particular phrase, right? How about I do the same for you?��


    After hearing what I said, William began to shout and cry more violently while trying to claw his way outside the situation.


    ��Oh, but since I��m not in mood for killing someone, I��ll refrain from killing you. Don��t worry, I will not Kill you, I��ll just hurt you so much that you would want to die afterwards.��


    William tried to run away, but I caught up with him easily.


    ��Where are you going, the party��s not yet over.��


    After catching up to him, I hand-chopped his shoulder strong enough for it to be dislocated. The sight of his arms being awfully dislocated made William scream louder. I did not stop there however. I Broke his other arm and tripped him down resulting on his ankle joints to be dislocated. I broke a few ribs but made sure that his organs were fine. I also twist his right knee. Right now, William��s cry for help became more and more faint. Looks like he��s slowly losing consciousness. Before he lost his entire consciousness, I bid him my farewell.


    ��That��s all for today, William. And I hope you learn your lessons already. Next time you tried to go in our way, I will Kill you right there. Understand?��


    He didn��t answer, He has lost consciousness.


    ��At least try to hear me before losing consciousness, will you. You��re rude.��


    I suddenly felt a presence somewhere at my back.


    ��Who��s there!��


    I readied my shotgun and aimed for the way where I felt the presence. What emerged from the dark is Eri.


    ��Oh, Eri, why are you here.��


    ��To escort you towards the inn.��


    ��How nice of you.��


    ��No, I just followed you hoping I could join the fun. But you obliterated them all quickly so nothing��s left for me. Besides, seeing you laughing maniacally really is uncomfortable to watch.��


    ��Hehehe, thanks for the compliment.��


    ��I��m not complimenting you, I��m just stating the facts.��


    After confirming with Eri, I called out to the one that��s hiding in the fountain ever since the start of my fight.


    ��You can also come out now. Stop hiding in the fountain.��


    What showed up is a Female with Elf-like features and is wearing a Robe that magicians usually wear.


    ��A Larean.��


    ��Oh, so that��s what a Larean looks like. She looks like an elf from my world.��


    ��What��s an elf?��


    ��Nothing. For now-��


    I looked at the Larean in front of me.


    ��-What��s your business here. Wait�� You��re in the meeting earlier too, right? You��re also a high-rank party leader.��


    ��Yes, that��s right. I am Luluca Canaria from Carata Tribe. I am the leader of Moonlight Party, and a fellow magician like you.��


    ��Um, hate to break it to you but I am not a magician. In fact, I have zero affinity in magic.��


    ��But, I thought you used magic of some kind to defeat those thugs.��


    ��Better not dig deeper to my ability. More importantly, why are you here.��


    ��I followed William here because I had a feeling that he will attack you here. I thought I could stop the fight if something goes awry. But I guess I don��t have anything to do in here at all.��


    ��I appreciate the thought. But I am more than enough to handle him.��


    ��Yeah, that��s what I saw too. I initially thought that you are just all barks and no bite, but you are more than capable. I��m sorry for doubting you earlier. And I hope we don��t end up as enemies, I wouldn��t want that considering you are undoubtedly strong.��


    ��Thank you. I just don��t want to be popular. I just want to explore. On that note, I want you to promise me one thing.��


    ��What is that?��


    ��I want you to keep my ability a secret from anyone. You will not tell them what you see here and what I used to defeat them. If you were questioned, just say that you were the ones that defeated them all before they can harm a unarmed civilian.��


    ��I promise. But why hide it? You are powerful and if you show it, you will be respected.��


    ��It will just became a huge pain in the ass if they knew that I am just level 1. I don��t want to deal with those people.��


    ��Okay then. I��ll keep my mouth shut.��


    ��Thank you very much. And for the little squirrel hiding behind the trees, I hope you would keep this a secret too.��


    I directed that to the person that has been observing me from the start, Derek the Guild Master.


    ��Well then, this is where we part ways. See you tomorrow Luluca. And I��m holding on to that promise.��


    ��Yeah, trust me. Goodnight.��


    ��Let��s go, Eri.��


    ��Ok.��


    Eri and I went back to the inn, but the doors were already closed so we went towards the windows and enter there. We went to our rooms and I lay down to the bed. My eyes became heavy not too long after laying down and a few seconds later, I was sound asleep.

 Chapter 9 – The Calm Before the Storm… Or so it Seems

    ��Good Morning Izuna.��


    ��Oh Hey! Good Morning Hans, Eri.��


    ��So, where are the others?��


    ��If you��re looking for Lord Mereid and the Others, they haven��t arrived yet. But if you want to, I can escort you to the Conference room now. Or if you want to wait here in the Lobby, that��s also fine.��


    ��We��ll just head to the Conference Room so we won��t bother you.��


    ��Okay then.��


    Izuna escorted us towards the Conference Room and Left afterwards.


    ��It looks like we��re the first one here, Eri.��


    ��Yeah, I can clearly see that there��s no one else in here besides us so I don��t need you to tell me that.��


    ��Hahaha, sorry ��bout that.��


    Eri and I sat next to each other while waiting for the others to arrive. Eri remained silent and planted in her place, while I can��t seem to relax because I feel that the atmosphere is beginning to became awkward.


    A few minutes have past and the awkward atmosphere still lingers. I need to do something before I became consumed by this awkward silence.


    That��s when a specific topic of conversation comes to my mind.


    ��Eri.��


    ��Yes?��


    ��I need to ask you about something, and I want you to answer me honestly.��


    ��What is it?��


    ��Are you really sure that you will help me in the upcoming battle? They are your former colleagues, right? Even if you said yesterday that you don��t care about them, I highly doubt that you don��t have any feelings left towards them, your kin. I know that I��m being rude in asking about your resolve but they are still your people. And I doubt that you care for me, a person you just met, more than you care for them, your long-time comrades.��


    Eri looked at me the whole time that I��m asking her. I can see that she understands my concern and that it is a totally relevant thing to consider.


    ��I understand what you��re trying to say, Hans. I, too, would doubt someone if they were in the situation as me. But I can only say these words for you. Don��t worry, Hans. They might be my colleagues but they were never close to me to begin with. You see, I never let anyone get close to me, even if they were my race or not. The reason is because of my work as an assassin. If you are an assassin, you need to prepare yourself to die any moment. That is the consequence of taking a life. The only person that I felt like I got close to is the Demon King because�� Come to think of it, I don��t even know why I felt close to him. Is it because I am chosen to be a general? To be someone with a purpose? Anyways, That��s my answer. And if you want to know why I trust you, it is because I feel that if I were to join you in your journey, I will become stronger than what I used to be. Besides, I still need to defeat you, right?��


    And with that, I became speechless. You can really feel her resolve in her words.


    ��I��m sorry for asking that question. I now feel ashamed for questioning your resolve.��


    ��Don��t be, I understand your concern.��


    ��But really, thank you.��


    ��The battle hasn��t begun yet, don��t thank me yet, thank me after all of this is over.��


    ��Don��t say it like that. You��re making it sound like a Death Flag of some sort if you out it that way.��


    ��I don��t understand, but ok.��


    *bham!*


    The door suddenly burst open and 5 people entered the room.


    ��Oh, you��re already here, boy!��


    ��Are you trying to destroy the door?!��


    ��Ah, don��t be so mad now, Altus. We��re the only people here so nobody will bat an eye.��


    ��Stop it, you two. Lord Mereid is present, you know?��


    The guild master is as lively as usual even when Lord Mereid is present. And Lord Mereid looks like he didn��t mind it at all. Lord Mereid heads towards his seat while Luluca, who��s been silent up till now, waved at us and went to her seat. Followed by Moris who silently went towards his seat.


    ��Come on now, Take a seat. Let��s begin this meeting. The main objective of this meeting is to find the way to repel the advancing force of the Demon Army and to protect our citizen. Let��s take all the precautionary measures needed and find a way to defend this town and its people. But before we start, you haven��t told us the name of you two. Would you mind telling us now?��


    ��Sure, Lord Mereid. I am Johannes Aarvold and She is Erylla Erfreth. You can call me Hans, by the way.��


    ��Nice to meet you, Hans and Erylla.��


    ��And also, come to think of it, where��s William?��


    Luluca and Derek pointed their gaze towards me for a moment and immediately averted it. The one who answered the question was Guild Master Derek.


    ��William couldn��t join us today because, apparently, he injured himself while hunting in the forest. I believe he was overpowered by a pack of Ice Wolves.��


    ��Ice wolves? That��s impossible! He��s one of the High-Ranking Adventurers in this Town. Mere Ice Wolves wouldn��t be a match for him.��


    ��He got cocky, I guess. Maybe, being overpowered by Erylla yesterday made him really pissed off and tried to go to the forest all by himself and the result is, as you can see, this.��


    ��I still find it really difficult to believe, but it��s true that, knowing his personality, he would do something like that.��


    Derek looked at me and smiled. I hope No one saw him do that. I will be suspected, otherwise.


    ��Now that the trivial matters are out of the way, let��s focus on the main problem at hand. The attack is expected to come tomorrow in the afternoon. We need to decide about what we should do before it happened!��


    As soon as Lord Mereid said that, the tension inside the conference room became heavier. Even if they fooled around always, when it comes to something as grave as the situation at hand, they can be pretty serious. Not that I doubt them in the first place.


    ��I still believe that we should prioritize the well-being of our citizen above all. We can let the army have their way inside the Town and Ambush them once they��re inside.��


    ��And you will let Lord Mereid��s Domain get Ravaged by those Demons?! That is unacceptable! You��re being too sentimental, Moris.��


    ��At least I��m not letting any civilians die! You��re too obedient, Altus.��


    ��Stop! Both of you! This is what we��re debating since yesterday yet we haven��t reach any conclusion. This is just consuming our precious time that we could��ve used preparing. You two, cool your heads off for a minute.��


    Altus and Moris both calm themselves down.


    ��Derek, do you have any plan in your mind?��


    ��I do, but it will be a suicide.��


    ��Can I hear it?��


    ��Of course. What I think is that we should intercept them before they reach the town. We should send the adventurers to intercept the attack even before they get in here.��


    Luluca stand up forcefully and looked at Derek with hostility.


    ��You��re telling us, adventurers, to die, you know! Is it that easy to throw our lives. We��re also living beings, we��re not even slaves! That plan is absurd!��


    ��Relax, Luluca. I only suggested that, and I don��t really want that to be the case either. I am an Adventurer before I am a Guild Master so I understand you.��


    ��I��m sorry.��


    Luluca sat down while gazing down.


    The Atmosphere began to look really downing. Looks like every plan that is proposed all leads to casualties that they are trying to avoid.


    If not for Izuna, I��ll just stay away from this town and let them handle it. But I can��t abandon my promise to her. That��s why I will end this crisis as fast as possible.


    ��Are there anymore plans left?��


    ��Looks like they��re all out of idea, Lord Mereid.��


    ��Are we really doomed?!��


    ��I would not really give up hope if I were you, Lord Mereid?��


    ��Do you have a plan, Hans?��


    ��Yes, and there will be no casualties on our side. That is what I assure you.��


    Suddenly, all eyes were pointed at me.


    ��Really, Boy?!��


    ��Yeah!��


    ��Are you sure about that?��


    ��Yes, I am sure. I know that you doubt me, Altus, but not this time. Since I am the only lifeline you all have. You all have no choice but to put your faith solely on us.��


    ��So? What is it that you��re planning?��


    ��Before I said it, I have a few Conditions.��


    ��Conditions?��


    ��Yeah! And I want you to agree with it before I tell you my plan.��


    ��We don��t even know what your plan is. Why would we agree on those?��Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.


    ��Because you don��t have any choices left. Give it up, Altus.��


    Altus still looked doubtful at me. Lord Mereid Immediately interrupted.


    ��Very well, if it��s within our power, we will agree with it.��


    ��That��s what I wanted to hear! So, here��s the conditions. First, Eri and I want to be compensated according to what we deserve to receive. I don��t want someone cheating on us so please, avoid it as possible. Second, I want you all to close the gates of the Town when the attack happens, Only Me and Eri shall be outside. If you want to see what will happen, just watch inside the Town, Do not, at all cost, go outside. If the Villagers want to watch us, then let them be. Third, I want you to conceal our Identity. Only the people inside this conference room knows our name so I expect you all to keep your mouths shut, Okay? Let the villagers spread rumors but don��t let them know our name. That��s all. Any questions?��


    ��From what I heard, the way you say it seems like you are planning on doing it only by you two.��


    ��That��s right!��


    ��Are you insane! That��s a whole army, you know?!��


    ��So?��


    ��That��s more than what two people can handle!��


    ��This is why I said that you need to put all your trust on us, right? If you can��t do that, then this conversation should end.��


    ��Wait!-��


    We were interrupted yet again by Lord Mereid.


    ��-We will agree on your terms. If that��s all. And if you��re confident about your ability, then we don��t have the right to disagree, considering that the situation is dire.��


    ��But Lord-��


    ��Quiet! I decided and that��s final!��


    ��I��m sorry, Lord Mereid.��


    ��So? What��s your plan?��


    ��Our plan is�� Just Leave it to us!��


    ������Huh?!������


    <hr>


    ��So, how did it go?��


    ��Good? I guess?��


    ��That��s broad, Hans! Eri, how did it go?��


    ��We were almost kicked out by the Lord himself after Hans said his plan. But the Lord was stopped by Luluca and Derek. After they calmed him down, Derek and Luluca looked at us while holding their forehead. They decided to trust us in the end but I can say that it is not really that good.��


    ��That��s so detailed! I told you to not say it to Izuna, right?��


    Eri pretended that she didn��t hear me and went on sipping her juice.


    Right now, we are at the dining area of the Wolf��s Inn. After that crazy happenings in the conference room, we decided to head back to the inn. On our way there, we bumped into Izuna and she insisted to join us. That��s what lead us into where we are right now.


    ��So, what are you planning to do?��


    ��Should I really say it to you?��


    ��Of course! Why not!��


    ��Because, I don��t like to?��


    ��That��s not a reason! Come on, say it to me!��


    ��Honestly, I don��t have any plan right now.��


    ��Huh? You said you will handle everything, right?��


    ��Yes.��


    ��And you don��t have any plans yet?��


    ��Yes.��


    ��Oh, we��re doomed.��


    ��Why? I only said that I don��t have a plan yet. I will head towards an unpopulated area outside the town later to know more about my ability so that I can create a plan. Don��t worry, I will make sure that this Town will be unscathed.��


    ��Oh, then everything��s fine and dandy.��


    ��So, can you let us rest first?��


    ��Huh? Already?��


    ��I am really exhausted emotionally, you know. Let us rest first.��


    ��Okay then. But let me join you in your training! I want to see more of your ability.��


    ��Ok, Ok. Just leave us be for now.��


    ��Ok!��


    Izuna left the Inn and we were left in the middle of the dining area.


    ��I��ll go upstairs now, Eri. Just call me if something happens.��


    ��Okay. I��m going outside the town to train. I��ll fetch you later.��


    ��Sure. Don��t attract any unwanted attention.��


    ��I know. See you later.��


    Eri went outside to go to her training area. I also went upstairs to rest and preserve my strength for my training later.


    <hr>


    I woke up a little past noon. How do I know that despite of the lack of Time-telling device? I don��t know. Instincts? Maybe. The only thing I should focus about is the fact that I need to go outside the town and try to come up with the most effective plan with the least possible effort. I do believe that effectiveness does not require a lot of effort, rather, effectiveness is relative towards how fast you deal with something, not how much effort you out into it. That is why I tried to finish a conflict as fast as possible, same for what I did with the Demon Generals, The Demon King and those thugs that attacked us before. Well, that��s just what I believe even before I was transported in this world. I would always find the fastest way possible in a problem without putting much effort.


    As I walk down the stairs towards the Dining area of the Inn, I saw Izuna on a table while waiting for me.


    ��Hans! Let��s go!��


    ��You��re awfully into these kinds of activities, aren��t you?��


    ��Well, I would be able to see how powerful you are. That��s exciting, you know!��


    ��You��ve already seen it once, right?��


    ��That��s a mock battle, I didn��t enjoy it that much because I thought that you were just a fraud. Besides, I haven��t seen your ability at its fullest before. This will be a great time for me to be able to watch you and assess your strengths, and also to see how powerful your ability is.��


    ��In short, you were just going to accompany me for your own amusement?��


    ��Yeah!��


    ��You��re awfully honest.��


    ��I do think of it as one of my good points though�� In a sense, this can also be a chance for you.��


    ��Chance for what?��


    ��Chance to impress me. You��ll never know, maybe I will allow you to be my lover if you were successful in impressing me. That��ll be awesome, don��t you think so?��


    ��I��m not really interested.��


    ��Wha-!��


    ��You know, I am so preoccupied right now that I don��t think I have time with that kind of thing. We still have plans for a journey without any definitive end. So I really am not interested. Also, If I were to choose someone, I��ll definitely want to impress Eri. Not that I have any feelings for her, It��s just because it is a lot more worth it that way. Lastly, I already have someone I love. So�� sorry, I guess?��


    ��I just want to tease you! Now I feel like I��m less of a woman! Screw You!... I still want to watch your training though.��


    I cracked a laugh.


    ��Do as you wish.��


    ��Why are you laughing? Are you making fun of me? Hey! Answer me! Don��t just walk away after that. Come on!��


    And with that, we went to the fields outside the town for some training�� While Izuna still tries to know why I laughed.


    <hr>


    The first thing we noticed as we arrived there was�� Beautiful. The scenery that unfolded in our eyes seems like it was taken from a fantasy setting�� Wait a minute�� I am in a fantasy world, now that I think about it. Anyways, the scenery was awesome. A field of grass and flowers in the middle of the forest. And, I forgot to mention, there was a recently-made huge crater in the middle and small ones all over the fields. Several Trees were also in the ground and traces of it being cut or blasted remains. Only one person came into my mind when I saw all of this��


    ����Eri!����


    ��Looks like we both agree that Eri did all of this, huh.��


    ��Well, look at this. It is absurd if Eri is not the one wo did this. Only someone like Eri can do this, she��s crazy strong after all. Right, Hans?��


    ��Yeah. I thought so.��


    Izuna pulled me while she tries to run.


    ��C��mon!��


    ��Where to?��


    ��Let��s go towards where Eri is!��


    ��Do you know where she is?��


    ��The path seems to be formed when she was destroying all those trees so it will be easy to find her.��


    ��Now that I look closer, it seems like that��s the case. Ok then, let��s fetch her before I start.��


    When we caught up with Eri, she was sitting while leaning towards what appears to be a huge Black Bear with a single jagged horn in its forehead. The bear seems to have sustained multiple slash wound and is losing an arm. The scenery looks like it fits perfectly to Eri��s personality. But when I looked at Izuna, she seemed to be awestruck and in disbelief at the same time.


    ��Hey, what��s the problem?��


    ��Can��t you see what��s in front of you?��


    ��Eri? The Bear?��


    ��This scene doesn��t hit as weird or unbelievable?��


    ��No. That��s just a Bear. What��s weird with that?��


    ��That��s a Giant Dark Bear!��


    ��So?��


    ��Don��t ��So?�� me! That��s a Rank A threat, you know! Even a usual Adventurer��s Party of Six will have a hard time killing that Beast. It is common sense to call to run and call for help whenever you encounter one.��


    ��Should I be amazed right now?��


    Izuna just sighed.


    ��Whatever, let��s just go.��


    We went towards Eri and asked her about the bear that she��s leaning on. Apparently, the bear attacked her while she��s training and in return, she retaliated by killing it, obviously. But apparently, what she had done is a big deal for Izuna, not that she really cared though.


    After the commotion, we returned to the open grass field and began training to know more about my ability. And it somehow bugs me that there are two people in the side that is currently watching me. I don��t like being watched, so this is embarrassing.


    <hr>


    After a whole hour of training, my understanding on my ability has certainly increased. Although I always heard ��Wow!��, ��Amazing��, ��How did you do that?!�� and ��That��s crazy!�� on the side, I managed to stay focused. And it certainly paid off. I now know that there are certain parameters and limitations to be met in order for my ability to used. Although it appears that you can use it whenever you want and whatever you want, it really is not that simple. These are what I learned about my ability so far:


    <ol>


    <li>I can materialize almost everything that I can imagine.</li>


    <li>I can use my ability within a sphere of 10-meter radius. So, I can summon something even in 10 meters underground or 10 meters above the sky from where I am.</li>


    <li>I can materialize something without knowing how it works inside. I only need to know what I looks like and what it does. I tried materializing a smartphone and it worked. But it is a bit useless in my case so I disregarded it. Additionally, I cannot materialize something that is larger than my ability��s range of effectivity. That��s why I won��t be able to materialize a whole Airbus A380. I can materialize it by parts though. The only problem will be on how to assemble it. Maybe I can materialize it slowly while moving so I can materialize the whole plane and not just the parts of it. I don��t know, I haven��t tried that method yet.</li>


    <li>Even though I can materialize anything, the skills required to use it is still needed. I tried materializing a M60 Patton tank and use it. The only problem is I do not know how to use it. Better learn how to drive it or just make it so that the driving can be easier.</li>


    <li>A book will be almost impossible to use when materialize if you do not memorize the whole book itself. It can be materialized but only the Cover and the paper will appear. No writings will be inside unless you memorized the contents of the said book.</li>


    <li>There is a limit on Materializing something. The larger and more complex an item is, the more I��ll be exhausted from materializing it, while small things can be materialized easier. I tried to materialize as many M60 Patton as possible and it took me 23 tanks before I felt exhaustion. While I try to materialize as many pencils as possible and it can be materialized practically indefinite.</li>


    <li>The time limit of the materialized item does not exist. I can dematerialize it whenever I want, though.</li>


    <li>I cannot materialize living creatures. I can create artificial beings but that��s it. I can create a robot though so�� that��s fine, I guess.</li>


    <li>I can modify something even in molecular level if I focus enough. I tried to turn a stone into gold by imagining it and it worked. Guess I��m also an alchemist now�� Better not mess with the Law of Equivalent Exchange though, just kidding.</li>


    <li>I can literally materialize anything. Even something that is considered as fiction or sci-fi in my old world. This is so fun to use!!!</li>


    </ol>


    That��s everything that I concluded after training and conducting a series of experiments while I��m at it. Right now, my ability feels like it��s becoming a part of me now. That��s just the sentimental part of me monologuing, just ignore that.


    ��That was awesome!��


    ��I admit, that��s entertaining, to say the least.��


    ��Oh Come On, Eri. Just admit that you��re also amazed of what I can do.��


    ��You��ll just get cocky. You would become so irritating if I admit it so perish the thought.��


    ��Aw, you��re no fun.��


    She frowned at me and avert her gaze from me with an ��hmpf�� murmur. Izuna looked at Eri then looked at me while smiling.


    ��What is it?��


    ��It��s just too overwhelming for me, what you showed us back there. You really are an unthinkable person with qualms on being the most recklessly absurd sometime.��


    ��That description describes me as a crazy bipolar guy, you know.��


    ��Maybe that��s what you really are!��


    ��Just�� zip it.��


    ��Hahaha. A Bipolar!��


    ��You��re being childish.��


    ��Bipolar, Bipolar!��


    I just let out a sigh. Eri seems like she��s not interested about the conversation, and Izuna will just get tired of teasing me anytime soon.


    We went back to the Town and brought the Dark Bear with us. Because Izuna was with us, we managed to bring the carcass in the guild without raising any suspicion�� well, maybe a few, but that doesn��t matter. Eri was rewarded 7 Gold and 31 Silver Coins for the bounty reward.


    Since there are few people in the guild hall today, the workload is not that bad. That��s why Izuna swiftly took care of everything and is able to talk to us after she��s done.


    ��So, Hans. What is your plan now?��


    ��You know what, now that I fully understand how my ability works, the plans in my head just keeps coming.��


    ��That��s what I want to hear! So? What��s the plan now?��


    ��Dropping a nuclear bomb to them would be the fastest solution and will be the most effective. But I cancelled it out.��


    ��Why? Even though that��s the most effective? Also, what is a nuclear bomb?��


    ��First of all, if you consider what would happen afterwards, that plan will be out of question.��


    ��Why?��


    ��Imagine this. If I were to plan an explosion that can destroy an entire city and also contains poison that will slowly kill you and I detonated it near your town, what do you think would happen?��


    ��Um�� We would die too?��


    ��Exactly! If I were to detonate it near the city, the shockwave will undoubtedly affect the whole town and the poison it contained will spread in the land itself. If you hadn��t been killed in the initial explosion, then you will surely die because of the lingering poison.��


    ��That sounds really bad now that you elaborated it. Do you have any other plan?��


    ��Use a Tank that I materialized earlier to kill them all? But I don��t know how to drive it.��


    ��Other ideas?��


    ��Hmm? Well, I guess I have more. But I would not tell you right now. I don��t want to see you freak out, after all.��


    ��If that��s the case, then you��re planning something absurdly dangerous, right?��


    ��Sort of.��


    ��Not that I can stop you. Looks like you made up your mind though. I��ll just wish for the safety of the two of you.��


    ��So, you can be sincere sometimes. That��s not bad.��


    ��Shut up. Anyways, tomorrow is a big day. I should give the two of you some time to rest. Good Luck! See the both of you tomorrow!��


    ��Goodnight!��


    ��Goodnight, Izuna!��


    ��Good night to the both of you!��


    And with that, Eri and I went to the Inn we��re staying in. It seems that we we��re out for a while since the sky��s already dark. Our Neighbors were returning from their work. We head towards our rooms and immediately fell asleep. Who knows that training can really drain you. Guess I��m not that athletic at all. Anyways, tomorrow will be the day. Not that I��m nervous, I��m just excited to see what will happen. I can��t wait.


    Just like that, I was pulled out of my consciousness and dragged into the depths of abyss that we call Sleep.

 Chapter 10 – The Preparation for an Attack… And the Arrival of the Army

    The day doesn��t seem to be special in any case. The villagers are doing their early morning activities as usual. The merchants are setting up their tents. The smell of baked goods envelops my smell. The Parents going to an early shopping while their kids are still sleeping. Today is just like any other day.


    The sun rising in the horizon and slowly enveloping the whole land with its rays. The Chirping of the Birds outside the window. The Unchanging Scenery Unfolding your sights every waking day. The Gentle Breeze that touches my skin, bringing in the Fresh Air to breathe. The Day doesn��t seem special in particular. Today feels like another normal peaceful day.


    ��


    ��


    ��


    Oh, and also, there seems to be an invasion of some army or whatever. And they probably want to destroy this place and slaughter the citizens. But that��s not really that relevant, so�� just like another day for Oreius, I guess?


    Enough sarcastic narration for today. The problem at hand seems to be looming around the corner. I guess we need to start prepare.


    And on that note, a certain someone is already banging on the door yet again.


    ��Hey, Hans! Are you awake!��


    ��Yes, I am Awake. I��ll just get myself prepared so just wait. Also, stop banging the door every single time.��


    ��Ok, I��ll head downstairs and wait for you there.��


    And with that, she rushed downstairs. Looks like she didn��t even care about the ��banging the door�� part. Well, that��s that. I guess I��ll start preparing before she bangs my door yet again.


    <hr>


    ��You��re slow!��


    I found Eri sitting on a table while fidgeting her dagger and looking at me.


    ��It hasn��t been even 10 minutes yet. I would say that I did pretty much what I could considering that I just woke up a little bit earlier before you start banging my door.��


    ��Whatever. Let��s just go.��


    ��But I haven��t had breakfast yet!��


    ��Go have your breakfast after we meet with the others. We need to know every detail about the location of the said Army, right?��


    She��s right. No time must be unwittingly sparred. I can��t help but just sigh.


    ��Okay, let��s go.��


    We head towards the Guild Building to meet with others and fully set our plan in motion�� And I need to finish this as soon as possible so I can eat my Breakfast.


    <hr>


    While walking, I can��t help but notice that Eri is more cheerful than usual. Even though you can��t really tell the difference, having been together with her while we��re travelling tells me a lot about her. And I can tell that she looks like she��s really in a good mood. Not that she shows it too much, but she really is.


    ��You seem to be on a good mood.��


    ��Huh? I��m not.��


    ��You can��t hide it. And I know why you��re in a good mood.��


    ��Hmm?��


    ��You��re looking forward for our fight, right?��


    She smirked.


    ��How��d you know?��


    ��Well, knowing you, a battle-hardened person, you will undoubtedly get excited when presented with an opportunity to fight and kill someone. Especially when there is a large group involved.��


    ��You really know me well.��


    ��Of course! I��m observing you ever since we started travelling together. Partially because I am interested in what you��re thinking and mostly because I don��t want you killing someone randomly. That��ll be a pain in my ass to handle. If I could, then I would��ve already put a leash on you.��


    ��Try me. You��ll regret it.��


    ��Would I? Let me remind you that in all the times we��re travelling together, you haven��t managed to defeat me in a single match.��


    ��You know what? Yes. I admit that I��m looking forward into the upcoming fight. But you just ruined it. I just wanted to have fun killing enemies, but you just went ahead and ruin the fun. Ahhh! You��re the worst!��


    Eri stormed towards the Building while I follow her. Looks like I went to far with the teasing. I need to apologize after the meeting.


    A few more minutes have past and we arrived at the Guild Building. The Guild is overflowing with people as usual. Looks like the assistants are having a hard time sorting out the job that they must do. Izuna was in the counter assisting as many people as she can. We decided to walk past her since she had a lot of people to attend to but she still noticed us. She waved at us while shouting our names. In return, we waved back.


    ��Hans! The others are in the conference room already. I can��t bring you there right now because, as you can see, my hands are full.��


    ��Don��t worry, we can go there on our own. See you later.��


    ��Ok! See you Later!��


    We head towards the conference room at the back of the Guild Building. Upon reaching the room, we saw all the participants sitting in silence while waiting for us. Lord Mereid had a serious look in his face while the others are minding their own business. As usual, William is not present. I guess he hasn��t recovered yet from the injuries he sustained in our previous brawl. As soon as we reached our seats, the questioning began.


    ��Now that the both of you are here, we can now start this meeting.��


    ��So, what will we be going to talk about?��


    ��The upcoming attack, of course.��


    ��But we told you that you can leave it to us, right?��


    ��That��s not really reassuring. Considering that you��re implying that the two of you would handle the hordes of Demons heading towards us.��


    ��You still don��t believe us?��


    ��I can��t just leave the fate of the villagers in the hands of arrogant people whose plan was just to leave the problem to them!��


    ��*sigh* Ok then, I��ll tell you all about my plan, but since this is the plan that I decided to follow through, I won��t accept any objection. Is that clear.��


    No one answered. Not even Luluca and Derek. Looks like they��re all taken aback with the condition I set before saying my plan. I can��t blame them if they would have difficulty in agreeing to me considering that there are lives that��s directly related to it.


    ��Fine, I��ll tell my plan. Well, just the gist of it.��


    ��Why don��t you tell us the whole plan?��


    ��A good performer doesn��t reveal their secrets, or so a magician once said.��


    Derek looked at me and smirked, looks like he had a grasp of the situation.


    ��Why don��t we trust the boy? Seems like he��s confident with his ability. After all, I decided to trust him the moment he told us to leave it to him.��


    Looks like Luluca got what Derek was trying to do and tried to help him.


    ��Me too, I trust him to handle the situation at hand.��


    ��It��s rare for you trust a person, let alone a human, Luluca. And Derek, you really trust this boy, huh�� Well then, If an Elf and the Guild Master trusts you, then I have no choice but to put my trust on you too.��


    ��That��s Great, now I can finally move on to the next part of my plan.��


    ��Can you please tell us first what is that plan of yours?��


    ��Oh, it��s just simple. I��m just going to set them ablaze, literally.��


    ��That��s all?��


    ��Well, technically, that��s just, like, 50% of the plan. But that��s enough, right?��


    ��What would you do to those that can resist fire?��


    ��Oh, they will know what Hell feels like.��


    ��Um, what is ��hell��?��


    ��Oh, I totally forgot that I��m not in�� Well, that��s just a really, really hot place.��


    ��Ok?��


    ��C��mon, let��s not dig deep into technicalities. The only thing you need to know is that I will set them on fire, and it will be effective, for sure. And you don��t need to worry about the Fire-resistant demons. They will be taken care of.��


    ��If you��re really that confident, then I won��t pry with it any longer.��


    ��That��s good. Now, let��s talk about something that I would need.��Stolen story; please report.


    ��Huh?��


    ��I want to reduce unnecessary casualties as possible so I need all of your help with that. With that said, Derek, does the guild have barrier user adventurers?��


    ��A barrier user? There are several people in this village that can use that.��


    ��Can they also create a barrier that can stop gas. Like poison or something like that?��


    ��I believe all of the barrier users can do that.��


    ��That��s great! I want you to gather them all. Also, I need to know what direction the horde of Demons would appear.��


    ��According to the reconnaissance group we sent, the horde of demons will be likely to attack the West Gate since it was the largest gate in the Village and it was the nearest gate to the forest.��


    ��Good! Now, the only thing that we need to make sure is that no civilians should be out of the Gate before the attack happen. If possible, everyone should be inside the village.��


    ��We��ll make sure that no person will be outside the village. Leave it to us.��


    ��That��s great, Altus.��


    ��That��s all that I want to talk about. If there��s no questions left, then we will go and set-up everything that is needed to set-up.��


    ��We��ll not delay you any longer. I��ll leave the Town to you, Hans.��


    ��Thank you, Lord Mereid. I��ll make sure to meet your expectations.��


    ��Good! Go ahead and prepare everything. May the gods bless you.��


    ��I��m pretty sure that I��ve been blessed. But not by the gods but by a ghost.��


    ��What are you talking about?��


    ��Nevermind, let��s go Eri.��


    We left the Conference room and went to the lobby of the Guild. There, we saw Izuna taking a break after the crowd was gone.


    ��Good Work, Izuna.��


    ��Oh, Hans, Eri, Good Work too. How did it go?��


    ��It��s fine, we��re heading towards the West Gate to set the traps.��


    ��I��ll go too!��


    ��Sorry, Izuna. But this time, it will be just Eri and me. You can still watch us later while it��s happening.��


    ��That��s a bummer.��


    ��At least I��ll be able to fulfill my promise. It doesn��t matter if it��s a bummer or not. We will complete the task that you gave us��


    ��If you put it like that, I don��t think I can argue. anymore I��ll just wish the both of you good luck.��


    ��Thanks, we��ll be going then.��


    With that, we head towards the West Gate.


    <hr>


    The West Gate is incomparably huge, probably 2 times the size of the South Gate in which we��ve entered before. I guess that��s why the Demon Army targeted this particular gate. The Forest also appears a lot closer here than the other gates. All those conditions are probably the reasons why the demons chose this particular area to attack.


    Upon reaching the West Gate, we started preparing for the attack. In front of the West Gate is a Field of Open Plains that is really suitable for setting underground traps and avoiding stealth maneuvers by the enemy.


    ��Eri, I want you to scout the enemies in the forest but do not engage. Just observe their movement and let them attack. However, if, in the middle of their attack, some of them were to run away from the battlefield, kill them. Do not let anyone escape. And also, I think that their commander, leader or whatever they call the one in charge of them will stay outside the battlefield. If you found him, or her whatever, subdue him. You can do whatever you want but don��t kill them. I��ll head there after the battle concluded, I will handle him.��


    ��I still want to kill their leader though. But fine, I��ll let you have the leader. As long as I can kill the deserter, that will be good.��


    ��Oh, and also one other thing.��


    ��What is it?��


    ��Do not, at any cost, come back here while the battle ensues. I don��t want you accidentally getting caught up in the commotion and in my traps. Focus on the task I gave you.��


    ��Do you think those traps could kill me?��


    ��Yes, potentially. But I don��t think you��ll let something like that kill you, right?��


    ��You really know me well.��


    ��Enough talking! I��m going to start preparing, head to your position.��


    Before she went to her position, she looked back on me while wearing a serious expression.


    ��Hans, I have something to ask you.��


    ��What is it?��


    ��Why are you collaborating with those humans? Knowing you, you can easily wipe out the whole Demon Army in a blink of an eye if you really want to. I just can��t understand. What��s the point of cooperating with those humans when you can just end it all by yourself, as fast as you can?��


    ��You really don��t understand at all?��


    ��That��s why I want you to tell me why.��


    ��Well, isn��t obvious? Because it��s more fun this way.��


    ��Eri continued to look at me in the eyes for a few seconds, seems like she��s waiting for a follow up of my answer.


    ��Wait, is that it?��


    ��Yes!��


    ��*sigh* I should��ve known it based on your personality.��


    ��Well, it��s not only because of that. I want them to acknowledge me. Well, not everyone, but those selected people that knew my identity. I want them to know that messing with me is not a great plan at all. I want them to realize how powerful I am. If I do what you said, killing the Demon Army while they haven��t arrived on this Town, then it will just be pointless labor. Might as well not do it at all.��


    Looks like Eri is not expecting that kind of answer. She��s looking at me with her eyes wide open.


    ��Now, I understand what you want to do. Indeed, our team is the strongest. And I also want them to know that. Now I��m fired up!��


    ��Let��s do this with no holds barred, then!��


    ��That��s what I��m planning to do from the start.��


    ��Oh wait, I almost forgot.��


    I materialized 2 black walkie-talkie that can be used to contact each other. I don��t know if this will work aspects but since I specified what it should do, then it should work as I intended it to do.


    ��What is that?��


    ��Here, hold on to this. That is a communication device that you can use to communicate with me while we��re far away. If you want to talk, just push the button on the side of the device and talk. Tell me if there are sudden changes in the movement of the Demon Army.��


    ��Ok.��


    ��Head to your position now. Remember to contact me if there are sudden changes in their movements.��


    Eri head towards the forest and disappeared from my sight. After she departed, I began to set-up the traps. Traps that will explode upon contact. Specifically, Anti-Tank Mines.


    What I��m going to set up below the ground are Anti-Tank Mines like TM-46 Land Mine but with an operating pressure of an Anti-Personnel Mines. Basically, I��m going to plant an Anti-Tank Land Mine that can be activated with just a pressure that can be exerted by a normal human. Oh, and also, Rack it up with 10 Kilograms of Explosives. That may sound as an overkill but since I do not know the nature of the enemies, I am not sure how strong or durable they are. Therefore, I made it so that no potential lives can survive once the explosives were activated.


    I walked in a zig zag manner to materialize the explosives within the 10-meter radius that my ability can reach. While moving, I��m materializing Land Mines. The Land Mines were separated in a way that they would not explode when another mine was detonated. But not too far that it won��t be detonated by the enemies at all.


    I walked around for almost 30 minutes to make sure that the place is littered with Land Mines. The Land Mines that I planted were 40 or more in total. If my calculations were right, then that would be enough to cover the entire open field. The moment I finished planting land mines, I realized that I did not put any marker to indicate that there is a land mine in the area. That in itself might be a good thing but if anyone were to wonder around this area after the battle ended, then it would be really bad for them.


    ��Oh well, I��ll just dematerialize all the remaining mines after the battle.��


    And with that, I finished my initial preparation. And at the same time, Lord Mereid and the others arrived together with the Barrier-Users that I asked them to bring. There are 27 Barrier-Users with them, more than enough for the job. But I guess the more people, the more effective the barrier will be, so�� it��s fine, I guess?


    ��How��s the preparation, Boy?��


    ��Hey Derek. I��m done with the initial preparation.��


    ��But I don��t see any changes in here.��


    ��Don��t worry Lord Mereid. The Fields outside is properly armed. I advise not to wander somewhere outside the Gate. I want to avoid any pointless casualties as possible.��


    ��If you say so�� By the way, what will you do to these barrier users.��


    ��I��ll brief them with the plan later. Right now, I ��ll take a quick rest first.��


    ��Where is Erylla, Anyway?��


    ��Don��t worry about her, she��s in position now. She��s only waiting for the attack to happen. Can you let me rest for a bit now?��


    ��Honestly, I��m restless when I think that an all-out attack will happen here. But if you can rest despite that, then that means that you really are confident in your plan. That��s why I decided to fully trust you now.��


    ��Thank you, Lord Mereid.��


    After that, they went away and let me rest.


    <hr>


    When I woke up, the sun is already at it��s fullest. Meaning, the attack will happen approximately 3 to 4 hours from now. I head towards the Gate and saw Derek, Luluca and Moris with the 27 Barrier-Users waiting for me.


    ��Oh, the boy��s awake. That��s good.��


    ��I��m still a bit groggy though. But yeah, let��s get started. By the way, where is Lord Mereid and Altus?��


    ��They head back to the Office. They said that they would leave it to you.��


    ��I guess they have a lot of work to do, huh? Well, let��s just do this. Oh, but before we start, let me finish the final preparation.��


    ��Final Preparation?��


    ��Yeah. Would you all like to accompany me? Oh, except the Barrier-Users, let them stay in here.��


    ��Sure!��


    ��Let��s go.��


    We head outside the Gate and walk towards the mine field. We stopped when we were 2 meters away from the Mine field. After that, I began the final preparation.


    I tried to imagine something that can be stationary and be controlled remotely. What materialized is a Turret and a remote control. The turret is 2-meter tall and had a long barrel and an ignitor below the muzzle. The body of the turret composed of a pumping mechanism and a huge canister in the back that will hold the liquid. What I materialized is an oversized flamethrower turret.


    When I finished Materializing the flamethrower, the three people at my back were confused.


    ��Um, what is that?��


    ��This is a weapon, Moris.��


    ��I get that it��s a weapon, but what can it do?��


    ��Basically, it can spout fire.��


    ��Oh! A small Metal Fire dragon!��


    ��That��s a weird way to put it. But yeah, it basically is like a Dragon spouting fire.��


    ��I get that it can produce fire, but I don��t think that that would be enough for an army. Considering some of them might be fire resistant.��


    ��Don��t worry about small details, Luluca. I already know how to handle them. That��s is the reason why I want you all to gather all those barrier-user, after all.��


    ��So, you really expected all of that to appear, huh.��


    ��Of course! We don��t know the nature of our enemies. That��s why we need to be as prepared as possible. Let��s go to the next point.��


    We end up setting 6 Flamethrower turrets in front of the West Gate. It took us a hour to set all of it up. With that, the preparation is completed.


    After setting everything up, we went back to the West Gate and meet the Barrier-Users.


    ��So, now that everything��s finished, let��s discuss the plan. Especially the role that all of you, Barrier-Users, will play.��


    ��This is getting somewhat serious.��


    ��Shh! Just listen. We need to know what we would do.��


    ��Okay.��


    ��This is what I want you to do. When I give you all the signal, I want you all to����


    ��Huh?! Is that really what you wanted us to do?��


    ��Yeah.��


    ��That��s unreasonable! Why would we do that?��


    ��Because we would be able to wipe out all the enemies if you all do that.��


    ��Are you really serious about that?��


    ��I��m serious.��


    The Barrier-Users just sighed.


    ��Okay then. We��ll do it. If this will wipe them out like you say so, then we��ll do it.��


    ��That��s good to hear. Now, proceed to your positions while we wait for the attack.��


    ������Okay!������


    The Barrier-Users all went to their position. After all of them are gone, only the 4 of us were left.


    ��What would you do now?��


    ��I��ll stay here and just wait for the attack. I advise the 3 of you to just watch from the comfort of the Town Wall.��


    ��We can��t leave you behind just like that!��


    ��Oh, but you need to. Otherwise, you would get caught up with the chaos.��


    ��Just leave it be, Luluca. Looks like he��s already decided to face it alone.��


    ��But Moris����


    ��Let him be. Besides, I feel that he��s strong enough to handle the army alone.��


    ��You feel it?��


    ��Don��t take me as someone innocent, son. I know that William��s absence is somehow related to you. I also noticed that Derek and Luluca is quite fond of you so maybe, they already know or saw your strength before. That��s why I can say that you��re certainly strong.��


    ��You really are quite intuitive, Sir. Yes! I can handle all of them so I don��t need all of you here. I don��t want the three of you to be injured pointlessly.��


    ��Let��s just go.��


    Derek looked at me.


    ��Boy! Good Luck!��


    ��Yeah! Thanks!��


    They then went inside the Town. Now, it��s just me and the flamethrowers and land mines that I set up. I��ll just wait for the army to arrive. Approximately, an hour from now.


    Eri hasn��t called me yet. It might be a good thing or a bad thing. I guess I should call her now to make sure.


    ��Eri?��


    Static.


    ��Eri, can you hear me?��


    Still, no answer.


    ��Eri?��


    No Answer.


    Maybe she doesn��t want to be disturbed? I can understand that, considering her job as recon. I��ll just give up on contacting her and just wait here. There��s still an hour or more, anyway.


    ��..ns��


    I suddenly heard a sound coming from the radio.


    ��Hans!��


    ��Eri! I thought you didn��t want to be disturbed.��


    ��I do not know where did you get that idea, but now is not the time for that. The Demon Army began to-��


    Suddenly, a combination of different roars and battle cry can be heard coming from the forest. The ground began to increasingly shake. I looked at the people looking in the guard tower and they looked terrified while someone is shouting ��Ring the Alarm! Ring the Alarm!��.


    ��The Demons began to move earlier than expected. They are all psyched up too. Be ready, they are about to exit the forest.��


    Eri sounded calm despite of the chaos that would happen a few moments from now.


    I looked at Derek, Luluca, Moris and the Barrier Users.


    ��Get ready. The Demon Army has arrived.��

 Chapter 11 – The Town Defense... And the Conclusion of the Attack

    ��Get Ready, The Demon Army has arrived.��


    Luluca and the group seemed to be stunned by the sudden announcement and the battle cries coming right inside the forest. Only Derek is the one that remained calm and collected while everyone is stunned.


    ��Hey! Everyone, Snap out of it! Head towards your positions. Moris, alert the guards to sound the alarm. Warn the civilians of the upcoming Attack. Luluca, Guide the Barrier-Users. Remember, keep calm and I do not want any of you girls and boys to get hurt or be in trouble., so follow Luluca. That��s all. Let��s move out!��


    It��s good to have Derek at my side. He handled the situation calmly. Looks like I can leave the others to Derek while I focus myself on all-out offense.


    ��Derek, I��ll leave all the matters inside the town on you. I��ll focus on defending the town. Make sure to not let anyone go outside the town.��


    ��Ok, Boy! Good luck out there.��


    ��Don��t Worry, I��ll make sure to resolve this as fast as possible.��


    ��Now that��s what I wanted to hear! But seriously, Good Luck.��


    ��Ok, just go.��


    Moris and Derek went to warn the Guards while Luluca and the Barrier-Users went to their position.


    ��As for me, let��s get this started.��


    A few moments later, Demons emerged from the forest and began forming a swarm of Demons on the opposite side of the Gate. They stopped after they emerged from the Forest and looked at me with mock and confusion. A few moments after that, the Demons became silent and the only thing you would hear is the ring of the Alarm Bells to notify the citizens about the attack. Looks like the Acting Leader of the Demons ordered them to be silent.


    ������


    ������


    ������


    ������


    I stood there waiting for something to happen.


    ������


    ������


    ������


    If you were thinking about what��s happening right now, the current situation is rather bizarre and somewhat hilarious. The Demon that appears to be their leader is talking, or shouting, whatever, to me. The only problem is that, I cannot hear him due to the distance between us.


    ������


    ������


    The Demon continued to talk while I can��t do anything but watch and hope that he would stop soon. He continued talking but, from my perspective, he was just moving his mouth. Still, he hasn��t noticed that I can��t hear him and still continued with what he was saying.


    ������


    Literally 5 Minutes later, the Demon suddenly stopped moving his mouth, I assume he��s already done talking to himself. I readied myself for the attack�� or so I thought. They haven��t even move an inch. The Demon Leader also looked at me like he was expecting something.


    So, I��m supposed to reply, huh.


    But really, I don��t know what to say. I don��t even have the context of his speech for me to come up with something to say. Still, he��s anticipating something from me. What I did is try to communicate with him through hand gestures. I pointed my index finger at my ears and then crossing my arms as if to imply that I can��t hear him.


    That was a mistake.


    The Leader shouted loudly and looked pissed off.


    I looked at Luluca who was the one in charge of the barrier users.


    ��As expected of Hans. Not even afraid to mock the opponents with gestures, you really are something.��


    ��Wait. Why is he suddenly pissed off? What Mocking?��


    ��You just mock them using your gestures, you know.��


    ��Huh? I just want to convey that I can��t hear him. What exactly did I just gesture?��


    ��You gestured something about him being and idiot and threatening to kill him.��


    That��s Confusing!


    ��Well I didn��t mean too����


    Suddenly, the Barrier-Users and the other bystanders that is present and currently watching me cheered loudly.


    ��Yeah! Die Demon!��


    ��You��re all Idiots!��


    ��Yeah, that��s right!��


    Those are just the few shouts over many more.


    I am so sorry, that��s just an unfortunate misunderstanding! I am an Idiot!


    Now that it��s come to this, I��ll just ride it all along. I don��t have a choice, so might as well. I tried to amplify my voice using my ability. Hopefully, they can hear it loud and clear.


    ��That��s Right! You Demon Idiots should just die and rot in your filthy place. You filthy creatures. You Disgust Me!��


    Shortly afterwards, the sound of loud shout and anger can be heard towards the whole Town. I managed to get them really pissed off. The leader then raised his sword while the Demons around him are making all sorts of battle cry.


    ��Yup, I definitely made them angry.��


    The Leader then point his sword towards me and with that, an army of approximately 5,000 Demons came rushing towards me. Thus, starting the attack for real.


    I materialized a mask that looks like those that is used during a chemical attack. A Gas Mask. One of the reasons is to hide my face from the thickening bystanders inside the Town.


    ��Yes, A few more feet and they will make contact with my traps.��


    After a few seconds, a loud boom can be heard, my trap has been triggered. But still, the sound and the shockwave of the bomb is unexpected, I did not anticipate it to be that strong.


    A few Dozen of Demons was sent flying towards the air with some being torn apart by pieces due to the explosion. The other Demons quickly grasped the situation and stopped moving. They had realized that traps have been set up in the field. The leader then sent out those Demons that can withstand explosions, together with their armors. They then resumed moving.


    ��Looks like they adapt to my traps. This��ll be a pain in the ass.��


    The second trap has been set out but with fewer casualties. The Demon in front are tanking the explosion while those that are behind them are being protected. But still, some Demons got caught up with the explosion causing them to be sent flying with their guts all around the air. Looks like the traps are slowly being rendered useless.


    A few more traps have been set and that��s when I noticed something. After 3 explosions, the Demons in the Front are being down for good. Looks like even they can��t handle 10kg of Explosives.


    The battle, rather, the one-sided annihilation continued on like this. The Demons are slowly being reduced with the loss of their Shock-Absorbent Demons, and Yes, that is a joke by me. Moving on, The Numbers of the Demons have been reduced significantly. I can��t tell the exact number but I can estimate that they have lost over a thousand Demons. Still, they are rapidly proceeding. They are almost halfway to the entrance.


    ��Luluca! Prepare the Barrier-Users! Activate on my command!��


    ��OK!��


    I observed the attack of the Demons and despite of the continuous explosions, they are steadily paced. I waited for the chance to activate my second plan. The Demons are persistent, even after losing almost a quarter of their troops already. They are proceeding while their leader is staying behind. Looks like, the leader has no plans on participating in the siege. That might be easier for me. I��ll just let Eri deal with him later.


    The attack continues for another 5 minutes. At last, the right opportunity arises. They have reached the las t quarter of leading towards the gate.


    ��Now! Cast the Barriers!��


    ��Cast the Barriers!��


    The Barrier users immediately cast the Barrier Spell. The Spell isn��t casted towards the Town, but instead, it was casted around the Demons in a shape of a Dome.


    <hr>


    A few hours before the attack.


    ��This is what I want you to do. When I give you all the signal, I want you all to cast the barrier on the Demons, not on the Town.��


    ��Huh?! Is that really what you wanted us to do?��


    ��Yeah.��


    ��That��s unreasonable! Why would we do that?��


    ��Because we would be able to wipe out all the enemies if you all do that.��


    ��Are you really serious about that?��


    ��I��m serious.��


    ��Are you trying to protect them? Are you secretly a spy for Demons?!��


    ��No! Look, just follow my orders and we can annihilate them without casualties on our side. Besides, I am supported by the Lord itself so it��s fine.��If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it.


    The Barrier-Users just sighed.


    ��Okay then. We��ll do it. If this will wipe them out like you say so, then we��ll do it.��


    ��That��s good to hear. Now, proceed to your positions while we wait for the attack.��


    ������Okay!������


    <hr>


    The Demons are confused as much as the bystanders are. I am also inside the barrier, by the way. All the Demons have been caught up inside the barrier. Almost 3,500 of them.


    After the Barrier has been cast, I pushed a button in the remote control and the flamethrowers began to start up.


    ��Now then, let me bring you all the inferno!��


    The Flamethrowers began to spew fire in a very wild manner, spraying them all around.


    The Demons are not that idiot either. They put up their Fire-Resistant Ones in front. They then started marching again. But a few seconds later, they realized something�� They can��t get the fire out of them.


    What I used was not an ordinary flamethrower, it was a flamethrower that is fueled up by Napalm. Banned to be used at living beings, this dude really packs a punch.


    Looks like they were expecting some kind of magic fire attack that only produces fire. Just like what I assumed, they do not have the concept of fuel. Napalm, on the other hand, sticks to the enemy because of it��s liquid properties just like a normal Gasoline.


    The Fire Resistant endured the Fire with difficulty, while those that are not fire-resistant tried to put out the Flame but they can��t because it sticks in them therefore, continually burning them in the process. Imagine being burned at the temperature of 800 to 1,200-degree Celsius. That alone can kill someone in a matter of seconds. That��s why I can��t help but laugh maniacally at this devilish plan of mine, Although I can totally feel the gazes behind me.


    Also, if you think about how I can survive such scorching heat, it��s because I manipulate the temperature around me to be cooler using my ability. I just imagined that I was in front of an AC and imagined what will be the temperate if that��s happening. In that way, I can control the temperature around me to be as cool as an AC in summer.


    A few moments later, the number of Demons significantly dropped. The Demons that weren��t fire-resistant died right after they were doused with Napalm. Even the Fire-resistant once are having a hard time resisting the fire. The number were now close to a thousand.


    Finally, after a few minutes, the other standing Demons began collapsing while holding on to their throats. Looks like the Air Components on this world were similar to mine. And with that as the case, they can be poisoned by inhaling poisonous gas. Looks like the Carbon Monoxide poisoning began to take place.


    Napalm can produce 20% more Carbon Monoxide than any other fuels. That��s why I used it, to completely kill them even if they have resistance to fire. Right now, there are only close to 100 that are standing. Everyone around them is either charred black, severely burned or asphyxiated.


    After a few seconds, no one was left standing besides me and the flamethrower turrets that stopped spewing fire. A mountain of Corpse formed inside the Barrier. Upon seeing that, I can��t stop myself from laughing maniacally. Is it because I am secretly a villain material? Whatever it is, one thing is for sure, The Attack was repelled and the Attacking forces was one-sidedly annihilated.


    ��You can now remove the barrier.��


    The barrier was not removed. I looked at them and saw them with fear in their eyes. Luluca was also stunned by what she saw, but immediately recovered.


    ��Hey, Hans told us to remove the barrier. Remove it now.��


    The Barrier has been removed and the smoke dispersed due to the strong wind that came. I looked at the opposite of the gate and saw the Leader of the Demons with its jaw dropped. He then ran towards the forest. I picked up my walkie-talkie and contacted Eri.


    ��Eri, he��s heading your way, intercept him. And also, wait for me. I��m coming.��


    ��Ok.��


    I looked at Luluca and told him that I��ll leave for a moment. I then rushed towards the forest and saw the leader being held by Eri��s Dagger at his neck. The leader has full of cuts and bruises that suggests that they fought before I got in here.


    ��Eri, let him go for now, I have a few questions. Just restrain him using anything.��


    ��Ok��


    Eri tied his hands on his back and I straightened him for questioning.


    ��Ok. Now is the time that I would ask for question. I just want to hear your answers and not any mumbles or complains. If you do that, I��ll stab your leg, got it?��


    ��Release me this once! I will kill the both of you and decapitate you bo�� Aaaargh!!!��


    I stabbed his leg.


    ��C��mon now, I just want answer, I did say that, right?��


    ��Ok, ok.��


    ��Good! Now, First question. Who sent you?��


    ��I don��t kn�� Aaaargh!!!��


    I stabbed his leg again.


    ��I do not want lies either.��


    ��I��m not lying! It��s true that I do not know! We were just send here by someone to attack this Town.��


    ��Hmm. I understand. Then, Next question. Do you know that the Demon King is already dead?��


    ��Huh? Are you kidding me? There��s no way he would die!��


    ��Oh but I can assure that. It��s because I killed him.��


    ��You��re Kidding!��


    ��Even After you saw this?... Eri, Remove the Hood.��


    Eri removed the hood and showed her face to the Leader. The leader��s face cannot be comprehended as he looked towards Eri.


    ��G-general Efreet? General Erylla Erfreth?! Why?!��


    Eri is the one to answer him.


    ��The Demon King is dead, he is killed by him. I don��t care if you believe me or not but, the fact that I am here with Hans is enough proof to show that The Demon King is dead and his generals, also.��


    ��N-no way! Then what��s the point of our attack?!��


    ��Nothing, you prove nothing, you accomplished nothing. Nothing. You just became an idiot that got his army annihilated.��


    The Demon then became silent. After a few moments, he looked at us.


    ��I have no master now. I can now live in peace. Will you let me go now? I promise not to disturb other Towns from now on.��


    ��And who said that you can leave here alive?��


    ��Huh?��


    ��Now that you know Eri��s Identity, I am afraid that we will need to kill you. No hard feelings, bro, you��re just unlucky to get in our way.��


    ��Wait, wait, I will not tell anyo-��


    A jet-black dagger sliced through his head easily, offering no resistance at all. The Head tumbled down the ground and rolled towards the side of a tree.


    ��Oooh, an effortless decapitation. Nice one, Eri.��


    ��That��s how sharp this dagger is. But it cannot compare to the weapon you used when you killed everyone in the Demon King��s Castle though.��


    ��Hahaha, you��re right. Let��s just head back.��


    ��Ok.��


    After the execution, we returned to the Gate of the Town. Eri and I are wearing a gas mask to avoid revealing our identities. The crowd also avoided us completely. Looks like they were still a bit to aback about what they saw earlier. After a few moments of Awkwardness, some people emerged from the back of the crowd. They were Luluca, Moris and Derek.


    ��Hate to break it to you, boy, but we need to head towards the guild conference room right now.��


    ��Ok, then. Let��s go, Eri.��


    ��Ok��


    With that, we went towards the Guild Building. What��s waiting for me was Mereid in his serious expression, together with Altus and, surprisingly enough, William is also there. William still haven��t recovered completely from his injuries, there are numerous patches and bandages all over his body, after all.


    We sat towards our seats and waited for Mereid to do something. Finally, he stood up his chair.


    ��First of all, I want to say something����


    He then looked at Eri and I and bowed his head.


    ��Thank You, so much, for saving this town. I am really in debt with the both of you. I don��t know what we would do if the two of you weren��t here.��


    We were surprised by what he did. In fact, everyone in the room was flabbergasted.


    ��You mustn��t, Lord Mereid! You are higher than them!��


    ��I don��t mind! Step back, Altus. I want to express my sincerest gratitude to them.��


    I don��t know what to do. It��s true that we��ve done a huge thing to this town but I didn��t expect that the Lord himself will bow himself down to us.


    ��Uhm, if you keep on doing that, I wouldn��t know what to do. For now, please stand up. We really appreciate your sign of gratitude.��


    Altus helped Lord Mereid stand up.


    ��First of all, why don��t we take a seat. It must be really uncomfortable standing while in the meeting, right? Also, since we are both acquainted now, can I call you just Mereid?��


    ��You insolent fool! Even though you saved our town, that doesn��t mean that you can disrespect Lord-��


    ��I allow it. You can call me Mereid for now on.��


    ��But Lord Mereid-��


    ��Silence! I made up my mind. A small thing like this can be tolerated. They are our saviors, after all.��


    ��Yes, my Lord. If you say so����


    I can feel animosity towards Altus. But I disregarded it. On the other hand. William, who was sitting opposite to me, was noticeably afraid. I looked at her and when he noticed my gaze, he began shaking. Looks like I traumatized him with that experience. I stopped gazing at William to avoid him running away. Mereid then resumed talking.


    ��I really am grateful with what you��ve done in this Town. Thank you so much for saving this Town from those Demons. We are forever in debt with the both of you�� Now that I expressed my gratitude, let us go back to business. As per the agreement, we will provide the both of you with compensation suitable for what you have done. I��ve decided to give the both of you half of the Town��s Current Budget as compensation totaling 64 thousand gold coins.��


    ������HAAA!!!������


    Upon hearing the amount of compensation, everyone just stood up and expressed their surprise and shock. Everyone beside Eri, She didn��t even flinch.


    ��No, no, no! That��s just wrong in all places! That��s too big for a compensation, Mereid!��


    ��That��s fair enough, considering you saved us all.��


    ��No. I won��t accept that huge amount. I don��t even know where I��m going to put all of that.��


    ��Then, how much do you want to be compensated?��


    ��Let��s see�� We will accept a total of 5,000 Gold Coins, no more, no less. That��s enough for us.��


    ��I didn��t think that it was enough compensation for the both of you. I need to give you something more than that in return, or else, I would feel guilty.��


    ��You don��t need to. That��s enough for us.��


    ��AH! I know. I will give you a mansion in this town. The Mansion is located near my place so it will be pretty guarded as well. How about that?��


    ��I am really grateful to you, Mereid, but we will leave this town soon to embark on a journey. A Mansion will just be wasted.��


    ��Please Accept it. That alone will be the only thing that I can give you to minimize the guilt that I feel.��


    I sighed.


    ��Ok then. We��ll accept that. It might be good to have a base of operations once in a while so, why not?��


    ��Great! Then, about the second condition����


    Everyone that is present in the room, beside us, stood up.


    ������We hereby pledge to the God Auroi and Goddess Riora to never even mutter a single word about the identity of Erylla and Hans to other people. By the power of the pledge, we declare it as absolute!������


    I was stunned. The sheer words felt like it contains power. A power much stronger than anyone.


    ��With that, we complete our pledge. You don��t have worry about your identity being revealed by us, we are now bound by a pledge.��


    ��Uhm, I��m still a bit confused. What was that pledge all about?��


    They all looked confused. Looks like the pledge is a common sense in this world. Eri then interrupted the confusing atmosphere and explained it to me.


    ��Pledge to the Twin Gods is the Highest Form of promise or pledge that lower bei- we can pledge. Although it doesn��t have any authority in terms of political perspective, it still is being exercised today because of its ability to bound the pledge between a group of people. And the retaliation in breaking the pledge is harsh and inhumane. That��s why no one will pledge in the name of the Twin Gods except if it was really needed to be uphold to.��


    Except for almost revealing herself to be a Demon, her explanation is really clear.


    So basically, pledging like that puts the pledger��s life at risk when they broke the pledge. Looks like they really trust me. That makes me feel special.


    ��Thank you very much for fully trusting in me. I really am grateful.��


    ��You should be, boy. The Guild Master, Head of Royal Knights and The Lord himself pledge to the Twin Gods for you.��


    ��Yes, I really am grateful.��


    ��So, what��s your plan after this?��


    Luluca went ahead and ask me.


    ��Well, Eri and I will leave this Town after two days. Before that, we��re gonna resupply and then head out. We��ll leave the Mansion to our acquaintance in this Town.��


    ��If it��s okay, we would like to hold a banquet for the both you to celebrate your victory.��


    ��Please don��t. instead, focus on the Town Recovery. We will just rest for today and go shopping tomorrow. Also, before I go, I will leave you all with gifts so please meet us in the North Gate before we depart.��


    ��Now that��s good to hear. I can��t wait to see what gifts you prepared for us.��


    ��Don��t be excited just yet, Luluca. It might not be within your likings.��


    ��Hahaha. Ok then.��


    ��So, is everything good now?��


    ��Yes. Everything end well. Thanks to the both of you. Once again, we thank you both for helping us. We will not delay you anymore. You can now go.��


    ��Okay then, we��ll go.��


    And with that, we finished our Mission and somehow owned a Mansion.


    <hr>


    ��I knew that I can trust the two of you with the problem!��


    Right now, we are at the dining area of the Inn that we��re currently staying. Izuna was waiting for us in the Inn and began to ask questions as soon as we arrived.


    ��Please, lower your voice. I��m exhausted and can��t deal with you right now.��


    ��Oh, come on. Don��t be sketchy. I��m just here to congratulate the both of you.��


    ��You��re done, right? Now, please leave us alone.��


    ��You��re no fun.��


    ��I don��t care. Look, even Eri is drowsy now.��


    ��Fine. I��ll let you off the hook right now. But tomorrow, I��ll be bugging you non-stop until you tell me all the juicy details.��


    ��Ok. Just let us rest, please.��


    ��Ok, I��ll go now. But before I forgot����


    Izuna looked at Eri and me then bow her head.


    ��From the bottom of my heart, thank you for saving this town. I owe you hella lot for that.��


    Somehow, I can��t help but grin. It really feels good when somehow is thanking you, I think.


    ��Yeah, yeah. I appreciate it. Now, go.��


    ��After I sincerely thanked you, that��s how you return my gratitude?!��


    ��Come on. Just go. I��ll properly return it tomorrow. So please, leave us for now.��


    ��*sigh* Fine. Goodnight.��


    At last, she was gone.


    After she goes, Eri and I went towards our room to properly sleep. Today was really an exhausting day, after all. But still, I��m a bit relieved about the event��s conclusion. No Casualties on our side and everything goes well, that��s great news.


    I head towards the bed and right after I lay down, I was immediately sucked into the abyss known as sleep.


    With that, the attack on the Town has come to an end.

 Chapter 12 – The Aftermath of the Battle… And the Journey Continues!!!

    ��So? What are we doing in a place like this?��


    Right now, I am being accompanied by Eri and Izuna at the Town��s Marketplace to resupply for our upcoming journey. We currently are standing right in front of a garments shop because of Izuna.


    ��C��mon, this is also a necessity, you know?��


    ��How��s that a necessity?! We already have our change of clothes so we don��t need any fancy clothes like that.��


    ��Maybe for you, but Eri is different. She��s a girl too, you know?! A Woman��s clothes is necessary for them.��


    ��What can you say to that, Eri?��


    ��I don��t think that I need such clothes. Something easier to move around is all that I need.��


    ��Oh, come on! Just give this to me this time, please? Just this once, Ok?��


    Eri looked at me, as if anticipating a reply for what Izuna said.


    ��*sigh* Okay. I��ll back down here. Do what you want. I��ll accompany you and Eri so don��t worry and just enjoy.��


    ��Alright!��


    The three of us head towards the Shop.


    ��But still, everything��s fine compared to yesterday, am I right?��


    ��Please don��t remind me of that again. I want to forget it as soon as possible.��


    ����We are entities that looms in the shadow���� is that right?��


    ��WHAAAAAAAA!!! What the hell, Eri! I told you to forget about it already!��


    ��It��s Amusing for me, though.��


    ��Please! Just forget it already!��


    The Agonizing feeling of wanting to die of embarrassment is because of what happened yesterday. By the way, two days have passed since the Demon Army Invasion. Today is our last day in this town. Coming back to the story, this is what happened yesterday:


    <hr>


    I am currently experiencing various aches all over my body. Looks like after the tension of what happened yesterday was gone, I was left with a drained body, both physically and mentally.


    ��Aaargh! I can��t even move too well. I don��t even know why my body aches. Did I do something straining?��


    I tried to get up from the bed to go to the Dining Area of the Inn. When I opened the door, Eri is waiting for me.


    ��Oh, Eri. Good Morning!��


    ��It��s Afternoon already.��


    ��Ah, is that so�� Wait! Afternoon?!��


    ��Yes. You��ve been sleeping for a long time now and, not to mention, deeply asleep. Even when I tried banging your door, you wouldn��t even answer.��


    ��Really? I must��ve been deeply sleeping if that��s the case. Well, is there anything that happened when I��m out?��


    ��Yeah, but first, the Owner of the Inn cooked you something, head to the Dining Area now.��


    ��I see. Please tell her that I��ll just prepare myself for a moment. I��ll head down as soon as I finished preparing.��


    ��Ok.��


    Eri then went down. I wore down my usual clothes and follow Eri down to the Dining Area.


    ��Oh, you��re awake. Now, Eat, eat.��


    ��Thank you, ma��am.��


    ��Don��t sweat it. You two are my best customers, after all.��


    ��Stop it. No use flattering us.��


    ��Hahaha. Don��t worry, I won��t do anything. Just Eat.��


    ��Then, I��ll take up the offer.��


    I went ahead and ate the owner��s prepared food. They are so delicious, after all.


    After eating, I materialized a single tablet of Ibuprofen to lessen my Body Aches.


    ��What did you just put into your mouth?��


    ��That? Well, that��s a medicine of some sort. Since my body is aching all over, I took that to lessen the pain.��


    ��So that was it. Basically, A piece of Magic-Storing Rock that has healing spell stored in it and the activation sequence starts when you ingest it. Am I right?��


    ��Uhm�� there are so many things that I didn��t get in your summarization. Yes. It can somewhat lessen the pain or ��heal�� so I guess�� It��s the same?��


    ��Why are you confused?��


    ��Nothing! Back on the topic, what happened when I��m sleeping?��


    ��To be brief, I��ll just summarize it. So basically, a series of events made the townsfolk gather in the place where the attack took place. Now they are gathering there in order to see the thing that you made, the fire-spitting one.��


    ��Ah, so that��s it�� Wait, I totally forgot to get rid of those!��


    ��Yeah, that��s what I thought so.��


    ��You should��ve woke me up earlier!��


    ��I tried, you��re really out.��


    I can��t help but put my hands in my forehead while I��m contemplating on what I��ve done.


    ��Come on, Eri, we��re leaving immediately. We need to get rid of those things quickly.��


    ��Ok.��


    ��And put this.��


    I materialized the same gas mask that we wore when we returned from executing the Demon Army Leader.


    ��And also, we need to change our clothes. If we were going to go there with these clothes on, there will be a chance that someone besides Mereid and the others might identify us.��


    ��Ok.��


    I used my ability to modify the looks of the clothes that we��re wearing. What came up after modifying it was a Corporate attire of some sort for the both of us. It might be strange-looking for the others but at least they wouldn��t be able to identify us any longer.


    I am now wearing a black long sleeve inside a black Tailcoat with a black necktie, black slacks and a black leather shoes with black socks under. While Eri is wearing a Black Long sleeve under a black blazer, black skirt with black stockings and Black Stilettoes.


    After the modifications were done, Eri began to complain.


    ��What the hell is this?!��


    ��A disguise.��


    ��I know that. What I mean is what kind of clothes are these. It��s hard to move and can��t even conceal my weapon. Forget about stealth, these clothes don��t even work as fighting attire.��


    ��Just put up with it. It won��t be long, after all.��


    ��I can��t even move without feeling constricted. Really, why did you choose these clothes.��


    ��Well�� They looked cool and intimidating, right?��


    ��That��s your reason?��


    ��Yes?��


    ��*sigh* Even though it��s not in my liking, fine, I��ll ride along with these. I can��t change your mind now anyway, right?��


    ��I��m glad you understand.��


    ��Let��s just get this over with.��


    ��Okay.��


    And with that, a pair of Suit-wearing, Corporate-looking people with Gas Mask in their face, head towards the west gate.


    But really, imagine someone wearing corporate attire with Gas Mask on their head. That��s cool, right? They look intimidating, right? Please Agree with me on these. Moving On.


    While on our way to the gates, we noticed that there are fewer people than before. Looks like they were all gathering in the west gate, like what Eri told me.


    When we reached a place near the gate, a crowd of people can be seen in the gate. Looks like they are trying to go to somewhere. I also noticed Derek, Luluca and Moris, together with other adventurers, are trying to hold the crowd and keep them away from the site.


    We rushed towards the scene without being seen. Upon reaching the gate, we got a much more grasp of the situation. We head to the top of the gate and tried to get the attention of the crowd.


    ��Silence!��


    I used my ability to amplify the sound of my voice. The attention of the crowd quickly focused on the two of us as soon as they heard my voice.


    ��What is going on here?��


    The adventurers that��s holding the crowd also looked at me, together with Luluca, Moris and Derek. When those three noticed that it is me, they immediately looked relieved, as if they were released from the job that they shouldn��t even handle on the first place.


    ��Ha-��


    Luluca almost gave my identity away. I place my index finger to my lips as if signaling her to keep quiet.


    ��Ha�� At last! The Heroes that saved our town has appeared.��


    Luluca managed to divert what he was just about to say. When the crowd heard that we are the heroes that saved their town, most of them cheered. The others that didn��t cheer looks like they were afraid of us. I think they are those that have seen the whole fight.


    ��Silence! Why are you crowding here in the first place?��


    The crowd tried to answer all at once, the result is an inaudible noise.


    ��I said Silence!��


    The crowd then became silent.


    ��I��ll talk with the Guild Master first. Do not make a ruckus while we are not here. I may be the one that saved your town but I can also punish those that disobeyed me.��


    As soon as I said that, the crowd step back but didn��t really disperse. More like they were waiting for what would happen next. I head towards Derek, Luluca and Moris.


    ��What are you wearing, boy?��


    ��A disguise. It looks cool and intimidating, right?��


    ��You know, Hans, instead of cool, you look like you��re hot. I don��t know how comfortable that was to you but it looks like it��s hot to wear. And the two of you looked weirdly out-of-place. Sorry.��


    ��Wha- What the Heck, Luluca. You��re not intimidated when you look at us?��


    ��Nah, it��s not working for me. Neither to these two beside me, I guess��


    ����Yep.����


    My sense of dressing took a deep hit. What can I do about my sense of clothing, it��s not like I know what cool clothes looked in this world, you know.


    ��Hahaha. Don��t be down, son. At least, you look a little neat.��


    ��Moris!��


    ��You still look weird, though.��


    ��Oh Why You! Little piece of shit! Come here.��


    ��Now, now, calm down. We still need to discuss something about the current situation.��


    ��By the way, why do they suddenly flocked here. It��s not like there��s still an ongoing fight, right?��


    ��About that, Actually, something happened while you��re not here.��


    ��What is that.��The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation.


    ��Well, before we arrived here, the people were wandering in the site where the Demons died. I don��t know what they��re doing but they are wandering on site. That might not be that bad but then, they start wandering too far and suddenly, a large explosion occurred killing one and injuring 7 more.-��


    Upon hearing those, I can��t help but feel guilty for leaving the site without getting read of the mines.


    ��-That might still be moderately tolerable, but then, the Fire-spitting thing began to spit fire towards the wandering people. That thing killed a dozen of people in the site and injured 30 or more. The Fire-spitting thing stopped when the people went far from the site.��


    ��What? I am sure that I turned the turret off before I left the area.��


    ��They still spit fire.��


    I reached my hands to my pocket where I put the remote before completely sleeping. It��s cool that even though my clothes were modified, what��s in my pocket before modification were still in there. But it��s not the right time to be amused. I took the remote control and inspect it closer.


    The inspection gave me an answer. Looks like there are 3 buttons in here. One is to remotely control the turret, the other is to stop it and the last one is for automatic guard mode.


    ��Why does it have automatic guard mode?!��


    So, that��s it. But why did it have a guard mode? Did I perhaps subconsciously add that? Why would I subconsciously add a guard mode!? I��m an idiot.


    ��So that was it, I think I place the turrets under guard mode. It detected sudden changes in the environment in front of it therefore registering it as an attack. That��s why it operated on its own. I��m really sorry about that.��


    ��Don��t be. In fact, it��s good that you told that turret thing to guard our town. It��s the people��s fault for wandering around the area and our fault for not making it inaccessible.��


    ��I��m really sorry.��


    ��Stop that. It��s fine�� Well, not really, but we will handle the situation if it goes south.��


    ��Thank you. For now, I��ll head outside to get rid of the unused mine and the turrets. I��ll be back after that. Don��t let the crowd come here, no matter what. ��


    ��Okay.��


    I head in the area by myself why I left Eri inside the Town, I wouldn��t want her to suddenly detonate an unused mine, after all.


    I used my ability and detect all the unused mine in the field. That��s when I noticed something�� Looks like the range of effectiveness of my ability increased after I defeated the Demon Army. I didn��t pay close attention to that though and just focused on dematerializing of the unused mines. After I was sure that I removed all of the unused mines, I proceed to dematerialize the turrets. After all was done, I head back to where Derek and the others were.


    ��I��m done removing unused mines and flamethrowers. It��s now safe to go outside. We��ll head back now.��


    ��I think that you need to address the crowd before you go. If not, they would try everything to find you. You need to at least, tell them your name, even if it��s not your real one.��


    ��That��s so bothersome.��


    ��But if you do that, they would stop searching for you, therefore making your life easier while in the town.��


    ��*sigh* Okay then.��


    I asked Eri to be at my side while I��m speaking in front of the crowd, in that way, we will look more intimidating, more so that Eri��s weapon were dangling in her back right now. The only thing that I need to worry is how to approach these people. I don��t want to sound rude but I don��t really want to sound like I��m approachable. I need to act intimidating.


    ��Listen, Citizens of Oreius, for your Saviors are going to speak. We are here because we were asked to, not because we want to. Therefore, we are in no need to act chummy to all of you. We do not need your cheers for we already received our compensation. We are going to leave soon and we don��t need any unnecessary fame. For those who are acquainted to those who died while meddling in the site of the attack, I��m sorry. I set a spell there to repel any consecutive attacks. I already removed that so you do not need to be cautious in there. But then, we apologize for not telling anyone about the spell cast in the West Gate. We��re just being cautious of any moles for the Demon Army. That��s all we want to say.��


    After addressing the Citizen, we were once again cheered upon by them. I guess it can��t be help.


    We prepared to depart but right before we go, we were asked by someone in the Crowd.


    ��We need to know the name of our Savior. We need to know whom we owed this great favor.��


    ��You need not to know our name. Just remember that we will always be watching. We are entities that looms in the shadow. Known to everyone as no one yet someone if needed. We who possessed the cursed eye, we who rule the world under. We are the Observers! And you ought to remember that well.��


    Everyone was stunned after hearing those words. It really is effective if done like that, but I can��t help but feel embarrassed about what I said. I want to shout right now but I need to conceal it to continue this fa?ade.


    After saying those, we immediately get away from there. Since it��s already dark, it became a really effective camouflage for us who wore dark clothes.


    As we arrived at the inn, I immediately dematerialized the Masks and return our clothes to normal to avoid suspicion.


    <hr>


    Back to where we are now, I let Eri and Izuna find clothes they want while I wait outside for them to finish. I still can��t get those embarrassing things I said yesterday out of my mind. I shouldn��t have said those, now I��m regretting what I said.


    ��Hey, son. How are you?��


    I looked towards the source of the voice and saw Moris heading towards me.


    ��I��m fine. By the way, Moris, where are the others? You��re not with them?��


    ��Well, we suddenly got a free time due to the conclusion of the attack so each of us went into where we want to go, they��re really looking forward to this Day Off, you know.��


    ��Where are you going, then?��


    ��I just want to visit my wife��s atelier while I��m at it.��


    ��Oh, you have a wife?��


    ��Yeah, why wouldn��t I?��


    ��Well, I just thought that you are a job first guy that has no time for such thing like romance.��


    ��I admit that working is still my priority, but you can��t just stop yourself from falling, you know. Now, My priorities were divided between her and my work. And I try to give her more attention than my work, if I don��t, I��ll be a clobbering bag, for sure.��


    ��You really love your wife, don��t you?��


    ��Well, of course. All the more so because I gave half of my life with her.��


    ��You really are an unexpectedly romantic person, Moris.��


    ��Believe me, even the stone-hard heart can be thawed by the warmness of love.��


    ��I can��t believe I��m being given a love advice all of a sudden by you, of all people.��


    ��Why did I even bother telling you all of that.��


    ��You really are a weird romantic person.��


    ��It��s better to be like that. Compared to ��We who possessed the cursed eye, we who rule the world under. We are the Observers! And you ought to remember that well�� is that right? Mr. Observer?��


    ��Ahhh! Stop reminding me that! Sorry, I apologize for making fun of you, okay? I concede. So can you please forget all of that, please?��


    ��Sure! Even though I don��t think that it would be an easy task to do.��


    ��Just forget it.��


    At the same time, Eri and Izuna burst out of the front door wearing what I can only describe as somewhat charming.


    Izuna was wearing a modified maid outfit of some sort. It appears that the clothes got inspiration from Dress of Maids and modified it to look more like a casual dress. Eri, however, looked like some kind of Priestess in a Japanese Shrine. Pink ankle-length long, red, slightly pleated skirt tied with a bow and a Black Kimono Jacket. It totally fits the color of her weapons that are sheathed in her back.


    ��Hi, Ladies. How��s shopping?��


    ��Oh, Mr. Moris, Good Afternoon. Shopping really calms my mind.��


    ��That��s good to hear. I shall go now, I still have someone to visit, after all.��


    ��Take care! See you in the Guild.��


    ��Yeah!��


    With that, Moris went to his destination while I��m left with Eri and Izuna.


    ��So, what do you think of our clothes now?��


    ��Not Bad.��


    ��That��s all?��


    ��Do I need to say more?��


    ��Of course, compliment us!��


    ��Just a Hassle.��


    ��You��re an unbelievable guy!��


    I went towards Eri.


    ��Are you comfortable with those clothes?��


    ��Honestly, even though it looks like it was uncomfortable, It really is easy to move in this. I might as well use it on night infiltration missions from now on.��


    ��Glad you like it.��


    ��Hey! Stop leaving me behind. Come on, tell me something nice about my dress too.��


    ��Uhm�� It��s wearable?��


    ��Ok, that��s it. Why do I even bother with being praised by you? So? What are you going to do now?��


    ��We��ve already restocked our supplies, we were ready to go. We are just waiting for the sun to somehow settle down so that we can travel without the rays of the blazing sun.��


    ��So, the both of you are really going to leave now?��


    ��Yes, that��s what we planned to do even before we got caught up in the Attack of Demon Army.��


    Izuna began to look sad after I said those words.


    ��Can you at least say goodbye to us with happy expression? You can join us up until we leave the town gate, you know?��


    ��But still�� Nah, nevermind. We gotta do what we gotta do. The same goes for the both of you, right. I��ll not pry any longer. I��ll send you off with a smile.��


    ��That��s what I want to hear. Thank you Izuna.��


    ��Let��s just get going!��


    After visiting a cloth shop, we head towards the Inn that we��re staying. We then packed our items and prepared to head out towards the south gate. Upon reaching the gate, we saw Mereid, Altus, Moris, Derek and Luluca waiting for us.


    ��Hey guys!��


    ��Hey there.��


    ��Hey Hans��


    ��So, it has come to this, Boy. I really appreciate your stay in this town and for helping us defeating monster. We would love it if you can stay here a little longer, you know?��


    ��No need for that. Besides, I love being on the road.��


    ��That��s bad, we would��ve appreciate it if you continue to protects us, you know. But we can��t change your mind now, am I right? We would just wish you farewell instead, Hans. Visit us whenever you like.��


    ��Thanks, Luluca. I appreciate it that everyone��s trusting me now than when we first met. But before I leave, I promised to give you all a gift, right, I might as well give my gifts to all of you right now. For Mereid, I��d like to give you this-��


    I materialized a walkie talkie that can cover a large area and is able to contact a person even if they��re literally at the end of the continent.


    ��You can use this to contact me if something urgent came.��


    ��Thank you, Hans.��


    ��For the four of you, I��d like to give you this.��


    Derek, Moris Altus and Luluca receive some sort of Bluetooth earphone That can be used to always be connected with everyone. It can also be connected to the walkie talkie that I gave to Mereid earlier. My ability sure is convenient in times like this.


    ������Thanks, Hans ������


    ��And Lastly, Izuna, I want to give you this.��


    I gave her the key to the mansion that I received.


    ��What��s this key for?��


    ��That��s the key to the mansion that we received as a reward for repelling the Demon Army. I want you to live there and maintain it as hard as you can. That��s our first base of operations, after all. Also, I want to give you this.��


    I materialized a smartphone and gave it to Izuna.


    ��That is a multi-tool device that you can use for anything you want. You can compute there, you can also listen to music with it, but the main purpose of that device is for communication. I want you to call me if something happened in the Town. You will be my eyes in this town. I know that you��ll be able to use this at its full functionality over time. Just try to explore the other functionalities of that thing, it can be very useful in multiple occasions, after all. That thing is already integrated with this land��s language so you don��t need to worry about not understanding it.��


    ��Thank you, Hans. For this gift and for all you��ve done in this town.��


    ��Don��t mention it. But I trust all of you to not reveal my information to anyone, ok? And also, use the things that I gave you only when you��re sure that no one will make a fuss about it. It might be troublesome if they knew that I am the one that gave it to all of you, after all. Lastly, there are secret features in the things that I gave to all of you. You will know it in the right time, but not today. I wouldn��t want to delay our departure any longer so I won��t explain those features, but don��t worry, it will be of use to all of you when the time comes and the need arises. With that, I have given you all the gifts that I need to give. We will now be going on our way.��


    We then walked away from the town towards the pier in the north gate.


    Suddenly, Derek and the others started shouting.


    ��Good Luck out there!��


    ��We pray for your safe trip.��


    I looked back at them for the last time.


    ��Yeah! You bet. We will become famous.��


    The last voice I heard was from Izuna.


    ��Come back anytime you��re free!��


    ��Sure!��


    And with that, we left Oreius. Effectively leaving everyone behind but leaving something to be remembered by in return.


    ��Now. What Kind of encounters shall we be able to see this time. I can��t wait.��


    "I can''t wait to get stronger too!"


    ""Off we go!""


    <hr>


    Demon King��s Castle was currently being attacked by the forces of the Knight looking guy. If it can be called an attack at all.


    ��Sir! There��s no sign of other Demons nearby. We also found corpses that might belong to the generals�� And there is a corpse that matches the facial description of the Demon King.��


    The Knight-looking guy looked at the guy that reported the scene that they saw.


    ��Really, are you sure?��


    ��Yes, it is unmistakably similar to the facial features of the Demon King in the Description.��


    ��Did you notice any other discrepancies in the current situation?��


    ��Actually, Sir, yes, we have. There is actually no sign of any army of some sort that attacked this castle. In fact, all the wounds of the generals appear to be made only with a single overly sharp sword of some sort. The Demon King, however, had no physical wound that can be observed. Most likely, he was killed internally. There are signs that he spit blood, after all.��


    ��Are you saying that a person or a small group of people defeated the Demon King?��


    ��That might be a possibility.��


    ��It can��t be. If it was done by a small group of people, then that group might be as strong as our current army. They��re crazy powerful, if that��s the case... Go back to inspecting the castle, search every nooks and cranny of any evidence that can lead to the information about the ones that defeated the Demon Lord.��


    ��Yes Sir!��


    The soldier then went back to inspecting the castle.


    ��Al!��


    The Magician Girl called upon the Knight-looking guy.


    ��Riz, what is it?��


    ��Well, Robert and Iona asked me to call you because they found something.��


    ��Ok, where are they.��


    ��At the basement.��


    ��Let��s go.��


    The Magician Girl, Riz lead the Knight-looking guy Al towards the basement. There, they saw the Blacksmith, Robert, and the Archer, Iona. They are in a room filled with what appears to be excrements and filths.


    ��What is this place?!��


    ��A slave room of some sort. Looks like they just throw a bunch of slaves here and forget their existence.��


    ��That��s awful! Who would��ve done such thing.��


    ��Who else�� it��s the owner of this castle, of course.��


    ��The Demon King.��


    ��Thank god that he��s dead.��


    ��We don��t have time to celebrate yet. We still don��t know the identities of the person that defeated the Demon King. If what I think is true, then they might be a lot more powerful than us, heroes.��


    ��But that��s not our job, right? We��re just here to kill the Demon King. That��s why we are summoned on the first place.��


    ��I understand what you��re saying, Iona. But are just going to leave this world without being sure that all the threats have been subdued? They might be a hassle to us, but it will greatly help the Citizens of this world.��


    ��Here we go again with your sense of justice.��


    ��What��s wrong with that?! Everyone deserves to live peacefully, that��s why we have been given this powers from the get-go, to help other people.��


    ��Right, right. I won��t argue with you anymore. I know I wouldn��t win if I try to reason out to you when you��re in your justice mode.��


    ��Do not call me like that!��


    ��Hahaha, sorry.��


    ��I��ll head upstairs, if you find anything, just call me again.��


    ��Sure, Mr. Hero of Justice.��


    ��Stop calling me that!��


    Al head upstairs and he was greeted by the dual-sword user.


    ��Oh Gus, did you find something?��


    ��Yes and No.��


    ��What��s with that bleak answer?��


    ��Well, I kind of found the treasure room.��


    ��That��s great, we can retrieve all of the Demon King��s treasure and use it to help with the recovery of the continent.��


    ��Uhm, there��s a tiny bit of a problem.��


    ��What is it.��


    ��The Treasure Room appears to have been emptied out by the ones that defeated the Demon King.��


    ��HAAA! All of his treasure?! How did they even transport all of those without being noticed?!��


    ��I don��t know. The only thing that we know is that, no treasure was left in there and there also appears to be a letter.��


    ��What does it says?��


    ��It says:  ��I hate to break it to you but you are late. I��ve already defeated the Demon King. Also, if you want his treasures, too bad. I already have all of them. You can do anything you want with the castle, I don��t really care about it. That��s all, have a nice trip back home!�� That��s all��


    ��Is he mocking us?! What a nasty guy!��


    ��The message aside, we can conclude with this letter that the one who defeated everyone in this castle was just comprised of a single person.��


    ��Wha- That��s impossible! A man with the power like that surely would��ve been noticed by the Empire already!��


    ��But it didn��t. Perhaps, he is great at hiding his true strength?��


    ��If that��s so, then we would have a bigger problem. If that guy decided to attack the Empire, we wouldn��t stand a chance. He easily defeated the Demon King, After all.��


    ��We need to find that person immediately and force him into an alliance with us.��


    ��Yeah, I think so too. The only thing we wouldn��t want right now is a SS class threat to the whole Civilization. We need to find that man as soon as possible!��


    ��I��ll be going back investigating. I��ll report if I notice something again.��


    ��Ok, make your investigation thorough.��


    After that, Gus left to investigate.


    ��Al.��


    ��Oh, Riz. Am I being called again?��


    ��No, no, everything is fine. But I kind of heard your conversation with Gus. Is it true that there might be a greater enemy than the Demon King?��


    ��Unfortunately, yes. But I want to avoid it if possible. Therefore, we need to find the guy that killed all the Demon King and his Generals before he decided to bare his fangs on the Empire.��


    ��There��s no end to it, after all. I thought we would be able to come home after defeating the Demon King. Now we are facing a greater danger? We might as well find a way to return to our old world ourselves.��


    ��Don��t worry, Riz. We��ll make this one quick and we��ll return home immediately. I miss our old world too, you know.��


    ��I just wish that it will be that easy.��


    ��Don��t worry, trust in me.��


    ��I trust you wholeheartedly. Every one of us trust your judgement. That��s why you��re our leader, right?��


    ��Thank you for that. I promise to return all of us home as soon as possible.��


    ��Yeah, we��ll be waiting.��


    With that, the castle exploration of the United Empire��s Alliance came to a close, without even finding a single treasure from the castle. They readied themselves to go back to the Empire. And they are heading towards the Port City of Oreius.

 Chapter 13 – A New Beginning, A New City… And A New Set of Problems!!!

    ��Hans! Just run! We��re nearing the deepest parts of the forest!��


    ��I know! You don��t have to say it every damn second!��


    ��Yeah, just keep running!��


    ��I should��ve killed those fuckers when I have the chance! Why did I even let them slide!��


    ��You��re an idiot.��


    ��Yeah, Eri? And you didn��t even do anything while they ran in front of us with dozens of Monsters chasing them.��


    ��It��s because It didn��t seem that bad that time!��


    ��Well, how about now? Look at where we are right now! Running away from these goddamn monsters even if I can finish them in a blink of an eye!��


    ��It��s your decision not to engage them while there is a chance of someone seeing us.��


    ��I can��t even�� just keep quiet.��


    ��Good. Enough pointless banters.��


    After quite some time spent on running, we have finally reached the deep parts of the forest.


    ��Now!��


    ��I don��t need you to tell me that!��


    Immediately, the mob of monster ranging from Rank C to Rank A, literally vanished without a trace. I dematerialized all of them to the point that there would be no remains left.


    ��If you have done that earlier, we might��ve been able to save our time running from those.��


    ��I told you, right? I will not use my ability to its extent when there is a possibility that people will see us.��


    ��You and your weird senses. I don��t know what��s running through that brain of yours sometimes.��


    ��I promise you, you wouldn��t even comprehend it.��


    ��That��s what I thought.��


    ��By the way, the sun��s setting. We should camp in here for the night.��


    ��Yes, that��s what we need right now, rest.��


    ��You say so.��


    To be able to shed light on the current events, let me bring you back at least 12 hours from now. The moment when we arrived at The Laotea Continent.


    <hr>


    ��This port is so big!��


    ��I believe that this is what the humans called as Town of Regia, the most prosperous town in the south. Also known as the Town of Exchange due to numerous deals being made in this Town, both legally and illegally.��


    ��So, this is, like, a Town for pretty much different kinds of Merchant?��


    ��Yup, pretty much like that.��


    ��This town is not compatible with me, I guess. I hate talking to other people, after all. It��s giving me shivers.��


    Eri looked at me with curiosity, I just didn��t bother to entertain her.


    ��So, where are we going now? Should we go to a nearby inn for accommodations?��


    ��We will not stay here for too long. In fact, we will leave this town as soon as we gather all the materials we need for our journey.��


    ��Why the rush? We can stay here for two to three days, you know?��


    ��I don��t want to undergo another ��please help our town�� situation. That��s why we will leave immediately.��


    ��So, because it��s inconvenient?��


    ��Yeah, I don��t want to be bothered.��


    ��I see�� so, what do we need to get before leaving?��


    ��Not that many, really. I just want to grab some books about this world to study and some of its book of recipes for me to recreate. I don��t really need raw material since I can materialize those myself.��


    ��That only?��


    ��Well, if you happen to like something, then buy it. It��s not like I��m restraining you from buying, am I?��


    ��Well then, I��m off. Let��s meet at the north gate after we��ve finished with our errands.��


    We then went to find what we��re looking for. I went to the largest Library in Town while Eri went off elsewhere.


    Upon entering the Large Library, I was overwhelmed by the volume of books inside. Somehow, the Thirst for knowledge that I discarded since I was sent here was refueled and added nitrous. I can feel my heart jumping up and down right now, well, figuratively speaking. But still, this Library makes me so excited than ever before.


    I went to the librarian to ask her about the books that I��m looking for.


    ��Uhm. Excuse me, can I ask something?��


    ��Sure! What is it?��


    ��Can you please tell me where to find the books that is centered towards the history of this world?��


    ��Oh, History of Veneofel? They��re at the second floor, isle 6554. Right in the History and Humanity section. Is there anything else that you want to ask?��


    ��I also need a recipe book for any dishes around the world. Do you have one?��


    ��If that��s what you��re looking for, then you can find it at the first floor, recreations room, Isle 21.��


    ��Thank you very much.��


    ��If you need anything, then do not hesitate to go to me.��


    ��Sure, I��ll do it.��


    ��Good! Enjoy reading.��


    ��I will�� Uhm, wait a minute, I almost forgot something.��


    ��What is it?��


    ��Is there a room for books that contains magic knowledge?��


    The Librarian suddenly had a change in atmosphere around her. She neither look happy or sad. She��s smiling but you can feel the serious aura around her. The Librarian then answered relaxed.


    ��Yes, we do have a section of those books in here, but it cannot be accessed by just anyone. You can access it if you��re Rank A or above, or if you��re a member of the Royalties. Do you qualify for those descriptions, sir?��


    She looked at me as if I cannot meet those expectations, which is true, but still, she��s looking at me in a degrading manner.


    ��I am afraid that I do not meet those expectations.��


    ��Then I��m terribly sorry about you but you can��t acce-��


    ��But, I have these.��


    I unfastened the bag that I��m currently holding and bring out a pouch.


    ��Is One Hundred Gold Coins enough?��


    ��Wha-! One Hundred Gold Coins?!��


    ��Hey, Ms. Librarian, we��re in the library. Don��t just shout out of nowhere.��


    ��B-but it��s a hundred Gold Coins we��re talking about, you know! It��s enough to start a moderate business in the town center. Are you sure you��re willing to give that to us?��


    ��Yeah, definitely. If you can give me the permission to enter the room containing books about magic knowledge, that is.��


    Suddenly, the aura surrounding her became much more approachable.


    ��I shouldn��t just give anyone permission to go there, you know. But recently, we faced something that requires immediate financial attention. Because of that, the whole library is struggling to survive. Without the money to pay its workers, some of them left to go and find another job. I shouldn��t just accept any bribe, but if it��s for the survival of the Library itself, then I might turn a blind eye and pretend that I didn��t receive any money from you.��


    ��So that��s what this is all about, huh�� Ok, I made up my mind. I will give you One Thousand Gold Coins. Consider it as a donation from me.��


    ��One Thousand?!��


    Tears suddenly fell from the Librarian��s eyes.


    ��Hey, don��t cry.��


    ��But�� With this, forget about being just able to pass by the day, we can even upgrade our facilities and acquire more books! I appreciate your help, really.��


    ��Don��t mention it, Besides, I love knowledge more than anything. You can say that this is some sort of my investment for the future.��


    ��I thank you, from the bottom of my heart. If you ever need my help or wants to visit this library again, just look for me. The name��s Alesia Ruvia.��


    ��Ok, Alesia. I��ll accept your offers. So, can I go now?��


    ��Certainly! Here is the key to the restricted room, you can access Magic knowledge there. If you search even deeper, you can also access the Prohibited magic spells corner. But remember, I did not receive anything from you. Got it?��


    ��Yeah, I know. Well then, I��ll be going now.��


    I then head towards the History section first. What I reached for is a book about the history of this world and the history of the Laotea Continent and its various inhabitants. Since I do not have much time to read all of the books I needed, I went ahead and replicate the book itself. It is true that I can��t materialize a book but if it is to replicate it, then there��s no problem. I used my ability to skim through the books as fast as possible, at the same time, the contents were being transferred to a recreated copy. This ability sure is convenient.


    Overall, I have recreated a copy of 5 books about the history of this world and its inhabitants. After that, I went towards the recreation room to find a recipe book. I want to acquire one so that I can recreate dishes in this world using my ability. I can materialize any food that I tried before, but if I haven��t tried it before and only know how it looks, then if I try to recreate it, the result will be an appetizing meal to the eyes but a bland flavorless food if eaten. That��s why I need a recipe book to make the dishes once and have a taste of it in order to recreate it using my ability.Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site.


    After replicating two recipe books, I went ahead to find the restricted room. The Librarian said that it is located at the second floor so I went upstairs.


    As expected, the room is more extravagant than I thought. It really is designed with royal in mind. There are Gold Plated Chairs and Expensive looking table. Heck, the Book looks like it was imbued with gems too. No wonder this place is aimed only for the nobles and high-ranking adventurers and officials.


    I went ahead and pull a random book in a shelf. The title of the book I pulled was ��Theory of Magical Composition and Execution��. As I look upon its contents, I quickly understood the subject of the Book. Looks like it was about What makes magic and efficient ways to execute it. It might be helpful for me, only if I could use some magic.


    I decided to replicate some of the Books for future context. The Books that I replicate is about Fundamentals of Magic, the aforementioned book that I randomly pulled earlier, the Elements used in Magic, Magic spell books for different elements and difficulties etc. for a total of 23 books. I would��ve been caught immediately if I don��t have my magic pouch that I acquired in demon castle.


    After securing the replicated books, I went towards what the Librarian said is the Prohibited Magic Spells Corner. The area looks a lot different than the other parts of the room. It looks like an Archives Corner than a Book Corner. The Books are dusty and old, just like what you would expect in a storage room than a library. The Books looks like it was untouched in a long period of time. It seems that no one wants to even open the books in here. It really lives up to its ��Prohibited�� title.


    I reach out to one of the books and look at its contents, that��s when I understand why no one was even trying to learn the spells in the books.


    The page that I read was about a spell that can release a highly poisonous gas that can kill anyone with just one breath in exchange for the caster��s life force slowly being eaten every second. There��s also an Explosion spell that can destroy an entire town but needed to gather a huge amount of mana before being able to cast. Overall, the spells in the book that I pulled are really powerful magic but the drawbacks were as huge as its power. If all the books in this corner where about lethal risk �C lethal reward spells, then it really is quite understandable why no one went ahead and tried to learn the spells.


    I decided to leave the corner without copying the any books in there. I tried to look around for more books that I replicate. Books that I can use for reference and, at the same time, Eri can learn.


    After a few minutes have passed, I almost completely cover the whole area for my search. The only thing that I haven��t visited yet is the shelf on the corner of the room. It seems that that corner is not different to other corners. The books are all about Magic Spells, just like the other shelves. Except for the pedestal in the end of the Shelves. The pedestal seems to be holding some kind of book.


    I approached the pedestal and saw a Book with Green cover. The design was simple enough. The title was written in gold. The title of the Book is ��The Magic Pioneer��. It looks simple compared to some books in the room. But what makes it stand out from the rest is its contents.


    The Book talks about the People who, practically, invented Magic. The Book explains thoroughly about the Origins Magic �C Magic spells that was developed by the Pioneers of Magic and is the basis of all the Magic Spells in existence. According to the Book, there are 7 Origins Magic: The Spatial Origins Magic, The Time Manipulation Origins Magic, The Mind Control Origins Magic, The Elemental Origins Magic, The Reality Bending Origins Magic, The Full-Body Strengthening Origins Magic and The Existence Origins Magic. These 7 Magics are not only the Fundamentals of every magic unimaginable, but also, the Basis of the World itself. Those seven origins magic ties up with the seven forces that makes up the Whole World and Beyond: Space, Time, Reality, Elements, Strength, Thoughts and Life itself.


    Although it��s been said to be lost in time, the Origins Magic is still in existence according to the book. Also, according to the Book, the 7 Origins Magic were transferred into grimoires by the Pioneers of Magic, they then hide it separately around Veneofel and told no one about its whereabouts. They did those countermeasures so that no one will be able to abuse all of its power.


    Right now, I feel that there��s too much information dump happening. Before I entered this room, I have no idea about magic itself. Now, I was informed about the existence of the Pillar Spells of Magic itself. This is so much that I can handle. In order to not experience Mind melting, jokes aside, I just go ahead and replicate the book itself. The only problem is that, I can��t seem to replicate the book. No matter how hard I try, I can��t seem to produce even its cover. There is definitely something going on if even my ability can��t be used in this book. I tried opening it again to look for any clues on why I can��t replicate the book. As soon as I reached the final page, I noticed something. There is a writing in the last page of the book, and weirdly enough, it��s not written using this world��s language. In short, it is written in English Alphabet and in a Prophecy Form.


    I read the passage out loud.


    ��Those who seek the power of this,


    Should not be gained by sword or fist.


    The mind will show you how it goes,


    And how the space can be controlled��


    There also seem to be a word, or something, in the bottom of the passage.


    ��Uhm, Spatium?��


    All of the sudden, the Book omitted Bright Light and began to float midair. It was so sudden that I almost trip myself while backing out from the pedestal.


    The Bright light then slowly became dull and after that, the book that formerly has green-colored cover, has been turned into Black and the writings changed from Veneofel Language to English Language. The Title is also changed. Now, the book is titled ��Spatial Origins Magic Grimoire��. There is also a name in the bottom of the Front Cover, Phillip Weiss.


    The Alphabets and the name combined, my suspicions became much stronger. I now believe that I��m not the first one from my world that has been summoned in this world. It appears that the writer of this book is also someone who came from Earth. And he was the one who developed the Magic that is now widely used by the inhabitants of this world. I don��t know what to feel about my discoveries. My mind is in the state of chaos right now and I can��t think of what to do with the sudden information that was dumped in me.


    I decided to steal the book itself than risking it to other people��s hands. Specially when this book is a Grimoire of one of the Origins Magic. I��m not going to leave this one to fate, not when a pillar spell of magic itself is at risk in here. It might even become a spark that can start a war.


    I then head towards the librarian to give her the key and leave the library to meet with Eri.


    <hr>


    ��What took you so long!��


    ��Sorry, sorry. It��s just�� So many things happened all at once.��


    ��What happened?��


    ��Well, I will tell you everything later.��


    ��Ok. What now?��


    ��Let��s go. We can go to the Forest if we use the North gate�� Before I forgot, let��s head towards the Guild Building in this Town first to register our arrival.��


    We went towards the Guild building to notify the Guild that we have arrived in this town. Apparently, it was a custom in the whole continent to visit the guild building after you reached a town. In that way, they can record your arrival.


    After that, we head towards the North gate to depart from the town.


    After walking for quite some time, we crossed paths with a group of bandits.


    ��Hey, hey, hey. Stop right there.��


    We continued walking.


    ��Hey! I said stop! You want me to kill you?��


    ��Uhm, we��re quite in a hurry right now so�� can you please let us through?��


    ��That��s now how this works, kid. If you want us to let you go, then give us your belongings����


    The Leader of the Bandit then focused his sight towards Eri who is wearing a hood to hide her horns.


    ��And give that girl to us. If you do that, then we��ll let you pass.��


    Honestly, I��m getting tired of their kind.


    ��*sigh* Look Sir. If you let us pass, then we will not touch you, or your mates. So, let us go, will you?��


    ��Hahaha! I like this guy, so brave! But, you see, this is not the right time to show your bravery. I know that you don��t want to look wimp in front of your girl but if you continue that attitude�� We��ll kill you.��


    ��Ok, that��s it. Eri, you can do what you want.��


    ��Oh, you��re giving your girl to us, how kind of you.��


    The Leader of the Bandit approaches Eri and attempts to grope her. What happened after is as expected.


    All of a sudden, the head of the leader of bandits rolled in the floor. Eri is now holding her dual daggers and her hood is removed from her head. Her horn is clearly visible to everyone.


    The Comrades of the Bandit that has been killed took a few moments before they understood what has happened. After they came to their senses, they ran away while shouting in terror.


    ��As if I��m gonna let any of you escape!��


    I erected a wall in the path of the bandits to cut their escape. Without nowhere to run, the bandits lost all their strength and slumped at the floor. They were looking at Eri in genuine terror while Eri is walking slowly towards them. They were pleading for their lives, but Eri is apathetic towards them, and with a blink of an eye, all thirteen bandits lost their head.


    ��You��ve made quite a mess.��


    ��I can��t help it.��


    ��*sigh* Wait right here, I��ll clean this up.��


    I used my ability to cover the corpses with dirt and grass. After that, we continued our journey.


    After a few minutes, just after the encounter with the bandits, Eri and I felt the ground trembling. After a few seconds, A group of adventurers passed us while running frantically. After they passed, we looked from where they went and saw dozens of mobs of monsters running towards us.


    ��Those fuckers! They passed the monsters on to us! Run!��


    And with that, we head back to the present.


    <hr>


    ��I��m exhausted!��


    Right now, we are at the middle of the forest. Eri and I were lying in the ground and looking upwards. As soon as the threat disappeared, the exhaustion from running came to my body. I can��t help but lay down in the ground.


    ��What should we do now?��


    ��I don��t want to move yet. Let me lay down a bit more.��


    ��At this rate, we will be here when night comes. Everyone knows that you don��t spend a night deep in the forest, you know.��


    ��Don��t worry, I��m here. Besides, we are far from Regia now. It won��t help even if we decided to return.��


    Eri sighed.


    ��If you say so.��


    ��Can you start a fire now? It��s beginning to get cold out here.��


    ��Ok.��


    Eri started a fire. After a few minutes, the Sky turned dark, it is now nighttime.


    I used my ability to create food. What I materialized is a simple ready-to-eat beef curry with rice. At first, Eri was hesitating to eat the food, but after her first bite, she shoved all the food in her mouth. Looks like she really loved it.


    After eating, Eri asked me about what happened in the Library earlier. I explained it to her without leaving any detail behind.


    ��So, you��re in possession of one of the Origins Magic Grimoire?��


    ��Yes, I think so.��


    ��But you can��t use magic, right?��


    ��That��s why I want you to learn the Spatial Magic in the Grimoire.��


    ��You want to give it to me?��


    ��Yes. It would be a waste to me, otherwise. I rather have you learn the Magic in the Grimoire than other people. You want to get stronger, right?��


    ��Ok, I��ll try. Can you give me the Grimoire?��


    I hand over the Grimoire to her.


    ��Are you really sure that you want to give this to me? I might become much stronger than you, you know?��


    ��Hahaha! Don��t worry, you��ll never surpass me.��


    ��You��re too confident. Wait for me and I��ll lake you eat your words.��


    ��Just get over with it.��


    ��Okay.��


    Eri opened the book and attempt to read it.


    ��So? What does it say?��


    ��Nothing.��


    ��What?��


    ��It has nothing in it. All Blank!��


    ��What?!��


    ��You��re trying to mess with me? There��s nothing written here! What should I re-��


    Suddenly, Eri became stiff.


    ��Eri? Eri? Hey! Answer me!��


    No use. Eri has become completely still.


    ��Eri! Hey! Eri! What Happened!��


    Suddenly, Her eyes turned all white and emitted a glow.


    ��What the Hell?!��


    After the eye-glowing, Eri collapsed.


    ��Eri! Are you okay? Hey!��


    A few moments later, Eri gained consciousness.


    ��Eri! Thank goodness. What happened?��


    Eri appears to be still groggy from what happened


    ��I��m alright�� What just happened?��


    ��You collapsed!��


    ��Me?... So that��s how it works, huh.��


    ��What are you saying?��


    Eri then whispered something. After that, she disappeared in front of me.


    ��Wha-��


    ��Want to have a brawl now?��


    Eri appeared at my back, pointing her finger in my side.


    ��You learned it! How?!��


    ��I don��t really know how to explain. The only thing that I remembered was the feeling of something being forced into my brain. After that, I became aware of the words to say to execute the magic.��


    ��That��s convenient!��


    ��More importantly, want to fight me now?��


    ��You��re becoming too cocky, Eri. Okay, I��ll accept your invite. Come on!��


    ��Teleport!��


    Eri disappeared in front of me yet again and appeared at my back while swinging her daggers. I managed to evade her strike.


    ��Not Bad. But you can��t beat me with that!��


    Eri tried to teleport all over while trying to strike me in my blind spot. The only problem is, I can evade all her strike. I can feel her bloodlust, that��s why I can pinpoint where she will appear. After a minute, Eri stopped.


    ��As expected, I can��t defeat you with that.��


    ��That��s what I��m saying.��


    ��Then, I��ll try different method!��


    Eri extend her hand towards me.


    ��Compress!��


    Suddenly, the space between me feels like it��s slowly compressing.


    ��So that��s what Spatial Magic is. However-��


    I forced my way out of the compressed space.


    ��-That won��t work on me either!��


    ��Wha- How come?!��


    ��Is that all you��ve got?��


    ��Gravity 200%!��


    I immediately felt that I was being pulled towards the ground. Eri then rushed towards me with her daggers pointed at me but I dodged it easily and caught her hands. I was then released from the increased gravity.


    ��What the Heck! You��re so powerful!��


    ��You know what? Honestly, I think you can beat me using that newly gained power of yours. But in order to do that, you need to learn to control it first. Your teleportation doesn��t work because I can sense your bloodlust, your compress magic is too weak and the Gravity increase is unstable, therefore I can still move. You can��t beat me with that unpolished magic of yours, but if you train hard enough, I believe that you can defeat me.��


    Eri sighed.


    ��I thought I can defeat you now, what a shame. I will train hard! Look forward to the day that I will defeat you!��


    ��Yeah, I��m looking forward to it.��


    ��Now I feel sleepy, where will we sleep?��


    ��Oh, About that����


    I materialized two tents that are already set up and equipped with heater since it��s cold outside.


    ��Here! The one in the right is for you, the one in the left is for me.��


    ��Good. I��ll sleep now.��


    ��Good night.��


    Eri head towards the tent and immediately sleep, she didn��t even close the tent. I close the tent for her and head towards my tent.


    Too many things happened today, and what an awesome way to end it by sleeping under the comfort of the stars, slowly drifting towards the oblivion.


    <hr>


    The smell of the grass enveloped my nose. the sounds of birds chirping around can be further heard inside the forest. Different types of trees can be seen around. Today is a really great morning, indeed. Everything is almost perfect, if not only for the hundreds of soldiers surrounding our camp.


    ��You two are under arrest for trespassing inside Grandiosa, Kingdom of the Lareans! Further resistance will result to unlikely injuries or even death. I suggest that you come with us peacefully to avoid unnecessary conflicts.��


    WHY IS THIS HAPPENING!

 Chapter 14 – Welcome to Grandiosa!!! And a not-so-welcoming welcome

    Grandiosa, A Luscious Kingdom of Greenery and Forestry. The Houses are coexisting with the wide varieties of vines and roots. It looked like a whole country eaten by nature but, in fact, it was booming in activities. Lareans looks like Elves with their pointed ears and Eyes tinted with Blue, Green or anything in between. Their clothes were, surprisingly, not like what is shown in any media on Earth. They were wearing normal clothing than pieces of scrap clothes and leaves. Despite looking old and derelict on the outside, the inside of the houses was comfy and inviting.


    Everything seems completely normal and peaceful, except for a certain duo being escorted by the Royal Guards towards the Castle. And yes, that duo was, indeed, us.


    We��re just camping deep in the forest, how the hell would we know that it was inside Grandiosa��s Territory! And we just woke up, for god��s sake! Who, in their right mind, would send hundreds of their troops just to capture 2 unsuspecting travelers who just happens to camp inside a forest. Of course, this kingdom is. Do you know how much convincing I needed to do to stop Eri from annihilating all of them? I never want to do that again. These idiots should be thankful of me for not letting a blood-seeking demon massacre all of them. If I don��t have any sense of reason within me, I would��ve been the one to banish all of them in existence. But I needed to consider the consequence of my action. That��s why I did not engage and willingly surrendered. While Eri��s looking at me with a lot of bloodlust. She must��ve hated being restrained. I need to seriously apologize to her later.


    As soon as we arrived in a major kingdom, this is what happened. What kind of welcome is this! Not only are we bound by hand, we��re also being dragged towards the castle. I hope this doesn��t get any worse.


    <hr>


    It got worst.


    Right after being dragged into the castle, were told to prepare ourselves without even telling us what will happen afterwards. We were then thrown into a prison deep in the castle dungeon prison. After that, they left without even saying anything nor telling us what to do next. Because of that, we were left inside a dark prison with only a torch as a source of light. In addition, there��s also a super pissed off girl with me that��s one word away from clobbering me.


    ��Hans? Do you know what I feel right now?��


    ��Uhm�� Extremely Pissed Off?��


    ��And?��


    ��Extreme Anger?��


    ��And?��


    ��Wanting to punch me?��


    ��And?��


    ��An excessive urge to Kill me?��


    Eri then smiled at me.


    ��You��re right!��


    She said it with a soft and cute voice.


    ��Uhm, Miss Erylla?��


    No reply, she��s just slowly approaching me while saying nothing.


    ��Hello? Erylla? Wait, what are you going to do with that those daggers?��


    Eri slowly approached me while swinging her daggers.


    ��Hey, Eri! Stop it! Stop!��


    I was then assaulted by Eri. I can feel her raw bloodlust focused on me alone. If I��m not careful, I could��ve hurt myself.


    I let Eri swing her daggers round until she exhausted herself. Her rampaged continued for the last 10 minutes until she stopped. After that, I approached her and started talking to her.


    ��So, are you done?��


    ��You��re awfully calm considering the situation we are in right now.��


    ��Why don��t you try to be like me and calm down too?��


    ��How come you��re that calm and layback even in this situation?!��


    ��Let��s think about it calmly. If we want to, we can bust through this prison and slaughter all of them with ease, but what would we gain by doing that? Nothing. If I were to kill someone, I prefer that it would be of some help or significance to others. If I were to kill just because I want to or I am pissed off, then that would leave a bad taste in my mouth.��


    ��So, what are your plans now? I believe that you let us be captured without offering any resistance because you are planning on doing something, right?��


    ��You really do know me�� is what I want to say right now, but the truth is I do not have any plans whatsoever. I just let us be captured because I don��t want those guards to be killed by you.��


    ��What the-!��


    ��Wait, wait. We can escape whenever we want to. But let��s just see how things unfolds. I kind of want to know what would happen to us.��


    ��*sigh* I can��t change your mind at this point, right? Just do what you want.��


    ��Good. You know me very well, aren��t you?��


    ��Of course, I do. Do you know how I��m observing you and trying to look for your weak point? I carefully observe you and your attitude.��


    ��Oh, come on. You��re making me blush.��


    ��Don��t get too close to me! You weirdo!��


    ��I can say the same to you, Stalker!��


    ��You��re looking for a fight?! Huh?!��


    ��I couldn��t ask for more!��


    Before we start a brawl, a guard called up on us.


    ��Hey! Stop that! Don��t start anything here!��


    There are 4 guards in front of our prison cell right now.


    ��Fix yourselves, you two have been granted an audience with the King itself. The least you can do is to present yourselves diligently.��


    ��Ok, ok. We will�� Wait, what did you just say?!��


    ��Fix yourselves?��


    ��No, before that!��


    ��You have been granted an audience with the King itself?��


    ��What the-?! The King?! But why?��


    ��It is to decide your punishment. You are an outsider, after all.��


    ��But why the King?��


    ��He is the one who imposes rules and punishment in this kingdom. He wants to make sure that no crimes are left unpunished and no good deeds are left uncompensated.��


    ��Oh, this king is a lot more level-headed and justice-inclined than the kind of King in my mental image.��


    ��Stop blubbering nonsense, we��re going to head out now.��


    What could be more worse than being imprisoned? Well, if you ask me, it is to be called by the King itself. We were, once again, being escorted by the guards towards the Royal Chambers where the King is. As soon as we entered the Chamber, we were overwhelmed with the looks of it and the people inside. The Chamber is full of Nobles and Royal Guards in the sides, while there are no people in the middle. There is also a barricade that prevents the onlookers from going to the middle part of the chambers where the usual suspects were brought in and placed to.


    The Guards brought us in the middle of the room facing the Throne. The King is sitting in the Throne and looking at us.Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.


    ��Oh, Mighty King, Rightful Ruler of Grandiosa, King Lucar Targon. We have brought to you the trespassers.��


    ��So, he is the king, huh? Quite Formidable in terms of the atmosphere surrounding him, I might say.��


    ��You two! Pay Respect to the King! Bow Down!��


    We were forced to bow down to their King. I can feel Eri��s Wrath from beside me but she��s trying to control herself to not create a more troublesome scenario.


    The King Stood up and looked down on us through where he was standing. Finally, the King opened his Mouth.


    ��You two, where are you from?��


    I raised my head to answer him, but a guard immediately pushed my head downwards.


    ��You can��t raise your head if you��re not permitted to!��


    ��I don��t mind. Let him be.��


    After hearing those words, the guard whose pressing my head on the floor, let go of me.


    ��Thank you, your highness. And to answer your question, we are merely travelers. We don��t have permanent settlement. We just go where our fates told us to.��


    ��And why are the both of you inside our territory?��


    ��Your Majesty, we have been chased by monster up until deep in the forest. After being able to outrun them, we settled inside the forest and make our camp there. We are not aware that we��re already trespassing. Please forgive us.��


    ��I understand. But still, your crime should be punished. It is not an excuse to say that you are not aware of what you��ve done. The Both of you still needs to receive punishment.��


    The King went back to his throne and pointed his scepter on us.


    ��Off with their limbs!��


    ��Huh?��


    The guards then grab us and is about to drag us to outside the execution grounds when I heard Eri��s whisper.


    ��I had enough of this����


    Suddenly, a guard flew all the way back to the Chambers Doors, destroying the door itself.


    Everyone was stunned on what had just happened. Even the King is speechless. A single girl managed to send a guard flying across the room, if that��s not absurd enough, then I don��t know what is.


    Eri then stood up and looked at the King.


    ��You know what? I tried really hard to control myself and stop this overbearing anger that I��m feeling deep inside. But you all just went ahead and get on my nerves. And now you want to cut our limbs? How about I do that to every last one of you and your citizens. Screw that, I��ll decapitate everyone instead, consider it a just compensation for making me angry.��


    The King, while trying to maintain composure, address his soldiers.


    ��D-do not fret! It��s just the two of them! You can overcome them with sheer numbers alone. The guard that was thrown was just caught off guard. If you remain on guard, she can��t do anything to all of you. Now, capture them and We will execute them Publicly!��


    Eri laghed hysterically and then pointed her dagger to the King.


    ��You dared to belittle me, you filthy mongrel! I hope you do not regret everything you said about me.��


    Eri then removed her hooded cloak revealing her Sheep-like Horns and her battle outfit.


    ��Behold, Insects! I have graced you all with my presence! I am The Assassin General Efreet! One of the Demon King��s General! I am Erylla Erfreth of the Demon��s Descent, and I am here to Annihilate you all! Be glad for I will take my time killing every last one of you!��


    And She just revealed her identity to everyone. I can��t escape this trouble now. First, we��ve been caught by the guards the moment we woke up, and then we were thrown into a prison, punished by the King and now, having our identity revealed in front of everyone. What a really nice day it is! I��m fucking ecstatic!


    Eri entered her battle stance while the soldiers are now hesitating to go near her. The King is now trembling in fear realizing that a Demon General has entered his Kingdom. The King can��t even command the Guards. Looks like he realized that resisting is futile in the face of a calamity.


    ��Not even going to resist, are we. If so, then just sit there and wait for your time to be decapitated!��


    Eri dashed towards the King while attempting to decapitate his head. I decided that this is the right time to intervene so I dashed towards the King and stopped Eri��s daggers from reaching the King��s head.


    ��I think it��s enough, Eri.��


    Eri looked at me while she��s still in his bloodlust mode. Upon seeing me, though, she began to calm down and put back her daggers.


    ��I haven��t even have my fun yet. What a buzzkill.��


    ��Would you mind stepping back now?��


    ��Ok����


    Eri backed away from the King while I helped him stand up and sit at his throne.


    ��Are you ok, sir?��


    ��What happened?��


    ��Uhm�� You were almost killed by a Demon General out of irritation.��


    ��Right! Where is that Demon, have you killed it? Wait, you��re with her! Are you a Demon too?!��


    ��Sorry to break it to you but I��m no Demon. I��m just a normal human.��


    As soon as he heard that, the King then commanded the guards.


    ��Capture this guy! He��s the one that brought the Demon to us!��


    The Soldiers quickly close in towards my position.


    ��So, this is what I get from trying to protect you from the Demon? I thought you were more reasonable than that.��


    The Soldiers quickly surrounded me while the King backed away.


    ��Pay for your sins with your life!��


    I sighed.


    ��What a stubborn King.��


    The Soldiers attacked me all at once. In return, I send them all flying. Every soldier that attacked me is now laying down in the ground, unconscious and scattered.


    The King was dumbfounded. Looks like his brain can��t handle what just happened. The King then, once again, lumped in the ground while looking at me, terrified.


    ��W-w-what are you?!��


    Looks like I have no choice but to reveal our identities to them. I would rather not, but if it��s to stop this unreasonable fight, then might as well do it. I can kill them all, but I don��t want to just erase a whole kingdom from existence just because its king is a bit of asshole.


    ��Sorry for the late introduction. I am the Slayer of the Demon King and its Generals. I am Johannes Aarvold and trust me, you do not want to mess with me.��


    The King was stunned about what I said.


    ��Y-You? You are the hero?��


    ��Honestly, I do not consider myself as a Hero. After all, I��m just an ordinary guy that happens to defeat the Demon King, nothing special.��


    ��No, no, no. Defeating a Demon King isn��t something that a normal human can do!��


    ��I just did what everyone would obviously do when they are threatened by others, fight back.��


    ��But still, being able to defeat the Demon King�� I need a proof.��


    ��Huh?��


    ��If you really defeated the Demon King, then you must have something that can be considered as a proof, right?��


    ��Why should I prove to you that I��m genuine? Do I have any obligation to do so?��


    ��Not really, but still, we can��t believe that you��re the one that killed the Demon King unless you prove it to us.��


    ��I don��t care if you believe me or not, your opinion is not important for me.��


    ��But we won��t hold a Hero Parade unless you prove it to us.��


    ��I don��t care, I��m not here to be welcomed, I��m just here because we were dragged by your army.��


    ��Ok, ok. We won��t hold a parade. But if I, the king, were to recognize you as the hero, then I need to see proofs.��


    ��How many times do I have to tell you that I don��t need any recognition from you. *sigh* This won��t end unless I show you any proofs, am I right?��


    ��Yes!��


    ��*sigh*, Alright.��


    I took of the bag whose appearance I modified to look like a normal small pouch so that the soldiers will not suspect anything from it. After that, I returned it to its original Bag Form and took 6 Items in it.


    ��Uhm, I don��t know if this will be enough of a proof but here are the weapons of the Demon King��s Generals. The Metal Spike Club belongs to the Giant one, the Lance that��s cut in half belongs to the lancer, the Flaming Bow Belongs to the Lava Man, The Staff is from the Horned Mage and the Huge Sword Belongs to the Knight-looking Guy/Demon. This last item is not really used in battle with me, in fact, I found it in the treasure room. I take it out because it looks intimidating, you know, black steel blade with ominous handle and terrifyingly beautiful scabbard. I thought this has some significance so I took it out. Is this enough of a proof?��


    After explaining, I looked at the king. The king looked like he can��t believe what he��s seeing right now.


    ��That Black Sword, is it possible? No! if what you��re saying is true, then it really is genuine. Did you know what that black sword is?��


    ��No idea.��


    ��That Black Sword that you have is ��The Sword that Cuts Through Everything, Mythic Sword Traia!�� That is the sword that once wielded by the great hero of the War of Laotea, Alfa Daelus! The sword is said to be forged from a fragment of a dying star together with the aid of the seven races�� knowledge a long time before Laotea has been named as it is. The Sword was then handed to the Great Hero by the Guardian of Laotea who has the sword for safekeeping. The sheer amount of magic contained in the sword itself makes it truly genuine. That is indeed a national treasure. It disappeared during the last war, so it was under the Demon��s Possession this entire time, huh.��


    ��Oh, I didn��t know about that, this sword��s amazing.��


    ��So, if you can surrender it to us, then it will be a great help to all of Lareans, no, to all of Laotea!��


    ��Huh?��


    ��You know, it is a National Treasure, therefore, it must not be owned by someone, it is the property of all the Seven Races itself!��


    ��What gives you the idea that I will give this sword to you?��


    ��But, it must not be owned by a single person only, it belongs to everyone.��


    ��And by everyone, you mean only the Lareans, right?��


    ��No! Of course not!��


    ��You��ve made a slip of tongue before. You want to gain advantage towards other races by possessing the Mythic Sword itself, right?��


    ��N-no!��


    I put the weapons back to my bag.


    ��I knew it, you��re just like any other noble scumbags. I won��t give it to you. Not this, nor the General��s weapons! You do not deserve it! Let��s go, Eri. This Place Disgusts me!��


    ��W-wait! I��m sorry! I admit it, I was wrong. But I can��t help it, you know. If you��re a ruler, then you will put your citizens first. If it��s to protect them, then acquiring is will be more than enough for protecting them. I won��t be persistent, so please, don��t go just yet!��


    Looks like I jumped to the conclusions way too early. Looks like he just wants to fulfill his duty of being a king to his citizens more efficiently.


    ��But even if you ask that, we don��t have anything to do in this place.��


    ��If that��s so, then let us welcome you to our kingdom!��


    ��I would rather not spread my name throughout your kingdom, though.��


    ��Then can you at least meet with selected people in this Kingdom. We would have a ball tonight celebrating your arrival in Grandiosa.��


    ��Uhm, I��m bad with that kind of event so����


    ��I insist! Please, let us, at least, have a small celebration for your arrival.��


    I have a feeling that this wouldn��t end if I don��t agree.


    ��Ok then, we��ll attend the ball.��


    ��Good! Then once again����


    The King went towards his throne.


    ��Attention, Everyone! Even though our initial meeting is rough, I still want to formally welcome you to our Kingdom.��


    Suddenly, everyone that are present in the Chamber stood up and the soldiers raised their swords and lance.


    ��Johannes Aarvold, The Hero who defeated the Demon King, and Erylla Erfreth, his companion. We formally welcome you to the Kingdom of Larean, Grandiosa Kingdom! Although it might be abrupt, I hope that you enjoy your stay in our country. Prepare their rooms, give them the best room that this castle can offer. And prepare their clothes, we will have a ball tonight to welcome the Hero in our Kingdom!��

 Chapter 15 – The Hero’s Welcoming Ball… and the Grandiosa’s Princess

    Right now, I am in the middle of a huge room filled with furniture made with gold, or at least covered in gold. There are two huge bed in the middle of the room with a gold closet in the side and a large bookshelf in front. This is the room that King Targon offered us.


    I tried to rest, but the sheer grandiose-ness of the bed make me feel uncomfortable despite of it being a very fluffy bed. I don��t know why, but every time I try to find the right spot, I ended up wanting to sleep in the floor. I guess that��s natural considering that I have never slept in such a huge bed like this before in my entire life. My body seems to adapt to me sleeping on grassy plains and inn��s bed ever since I was transported in this world.


    I looked at Eri who��s in the other bed, and it looks like she��s not a fan of the bed either.


    ��Hey Eri, are you ok?��


    ��And what, in all of these mess, makes you think that I��m ok?��


    ��So, that��s a no?��


    Eri glared at me with killing intent.


    ��Uhm����


    I shut my mouth so that I wouldn��t carelessly tick off the wild bomb next to me. Even more so when Eri��s pent-up anger is partly my fault.


    Silence filled the entire room as I lie in my bed. Lying in bed in silence makes me notice small and rather insignificant details in the room. Like the cobwebs in the corner of the ceiling, and the patterns in the wall. By the looks of the room, I could say that this room hasn��t been used in a long time. I guess this room is reserved only for those that has incredible influence like royalties or, perhaps, previous heroes. This might be suitable for the aforementioned people, but for a party like Eri and Me, I don��t think that this will be a very comfortable stay for us.


    Time slowly passed by while were lying on the bed. I can��t tell how much time had passed but it felt like hours when you can��t relax.


    Finally, I heard a deep sigh beside me. I look beside me and saw Eri sitting on the side of her bed, facing me.


    ��So?��


    I sat at the side of my bed facing her.


    ��So what?��


    ��What��s the plan now?��


    ��Plan?��


    ��Plan! What are we going to do now? Should we escape stealthily or just hack and slash our way out? I personally want to behead that coward king, but if you want to take him as hostage, then I��ll just beat him until he��s almost dead.��


    ��First of all, can you stop talking about killing every single time? Not everything can be solved by killing. Second, I really have no plan, at all. Heck, I didn��t even think that we��d end up in Grandiosa, you know. Right now, I just want to go with the flow and avoid getting involved in needless fights. That��s why I will participate in the ball. Besides, it is better to gain allies than enemies, right?��


    ��Is it really better? I can deal with those weaklings easily. I can��t even think of any benefits that we could gain if they became our ally.��


    ��I understand what you��re saying. It��s true that you can easily annihilate all of them without breaking a sweat. But what would we gain from that action? Only the Animosity of others towards us and a wanted poster, that��s all. Personally, I don��t want to kill anyone if it can be avoided. I don��t want to dirty my hands only because they pissed me off a little. I might not look like it but I appreciate life. I don��t want to view others with prejudice towards their gender, race or anything that can be used to discriminate others. If Grandiosa became our ally, on the other hand, we will have an entire kingdom to back us up, not that we need them, but it might become handy in the future.��


    ��Even if you said that�� You still killed my former comrades and the demons that attacked Oreius, not that I care about them.��


    ��I killed those Demon Generals and the Demon King because they show animosity towards me first. I killed the demons that wants to invade Oreius because I don��t want to see innocent people die. They attacked a Town, it��s only natural that there will be casualties, the only difference is that, all the casualties came from their forces, not ours.��


    ��So, we won��t be doing anything at all?��


    ��That��s right�� is what I want to say, but if we still idle, that won��t be fun at all. For now, let��s stay calm and follow their lead. I am sure that something��s already brewing in this kingdom, particularly, surrounding our arrival. I am certain that there will be factions who will not agree with how I do things, all the more so since I have a demon companion, and a former Demon King General at that.��


    ��You mean, an opposition towards you, A Hero?��


    ��Yeah. And this will be the fun part, -��


    I looked at Eri with anticipation.


    ��- I want you to deal with those guys.��


    It seems that I got Eri��s attention with those words, she��s now looking at me with curiosity.


    ��Hoho, so that��s what this talk��s about, huh? But won��t it contradict what you said earlier?��


    ��No, not at all. I mean, you��re the one who will do it, after all. Besides, once they bare their fangs on me and you, that will be the final mistake that they will make in their whole lives����


    No reply from Eri.


    ��You know, Final Mistake because they will die, right? You got it?��


    ��Just stop. That��s not even funny. But, I can��t help but get excited just by thinking about it. It might not satiate me in full, but that will do�� for now.��


    ��For now?��


    As if trying to avoid the topic, she looked away for a moment and looked at me again.


    ��Don��t worry about it. By the way, how long do we have to wait inside this uncomfortable room? They said that they would send someone to pick us up and prepare us for the ball, right?��


    ��That, I��m not sure either. There��s no clock in this castle so I don��t know how much time had passed.��


    ��Clock? What��s that?��


    ��A tool from my world that tells time.��


    ������


    ��Don��t worry about it. It��s not that important. No need for you to know.��


    ��Are you mocking me?��


    ��No, I��m not, I��m not.�� I replied sarcastically.


    Suddenly, the Door burst open and 4 people entered. 3 Female Lareans and a Beastfolk.


    One of them dressed more proper than the others, looks like she��s the leader. The Leader stepped forward and bowed, the three others followed the Larean leader and bowed as well.


    ��Greetings, esteemed hero and his companion. I am the head of the Maid operations of this household, Lori Lalatei. It��s a pleasure to meet the both you.��


    Lori once again bowed.


    ��I have brought 3 of the best maids of this household to assist the two of you in preparing for the ball.��


    The three other maids introduced themselves.


    ��Good afternoon, Sir Hero, I��m Leila Hana.��


    ��Frela Florel.��


    ��Uhm�� Erm�� M-my name ith -��


    She bit her tongue.


    Yup, she bit her tongue.


    ��U-Uhm��  Erm�� My n-name is Ayaka Nagi.��


    Lori continues.


    ��It��s a pleasure to work for the both of you. Do you have any questions?��


    Eri looked at me. Well, I don��t have any questions, but I have to confirm something.


    I stood up and head towards the Fox-eared Beastfolk.


    ��Your name is Nagi, right?��


    ��Yes! -��


    She looked surprised, but quickly returned to her meek self.


    ��- Uhm�� I mean, yes sir. But how did you know? I am always being mistaken as Ayaka by other people. Are you familiar with us, beastfolk?��


    ��Kind of? Well, I have a Beastfolk companion back at Oreius so�� that��s it, I guess?��


    Well, not really. I don��t even know Izuna��s Surname. I don��t even know if Izuna is her given name or surname. I just took a wild guess since the name reminds me of a Japanese name, with their Surname-first-Given name-last.


    ��Well, I just want to make sure, really. I have no further questions, Eri?��


    ��None.��


    ��Well, that��s about it.��


    Lori then approached me.


    ��It��s time, Sir. You need to start preparing. Nagi and I will be your helpers.��


    She then looked at the two remaining Lareans in the room.


    ��Leila, Frela. Take care of the hero��s companion��


    ��Yes Ma��am.��


    ��Ok.��


    They both replied.


    Leila and Frela proceeded to guide Eri out of the room.


    ��Wait, where are they taking her?��


    ��Sir, the preparations of a Lady is different from yours.��


    ��But, is there a need for us to be separated?��


    ��Of course! A Lady needs to prepare, and when I say prepare, I mean extravagantly.��


    I can��t help but sigh.  I really don��t want her out of my sight, to be honest. I��m worried about everyone else in this castle once they ticked her off.


    ��Sir, let��s begin our preparation.��


    ��Okay.��


    Lori murmured something loud enough for me to hear.


    ��This��ll be fun.��


    ��Wait, what?��


    ��Nothing, let��s begin, shall we?��


    I��ve got a really bad feeling about this.Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation.


    <hr>


    ��You look great, Hero!��


    ��Really? So, is this the right one?��


    ��No! next!��


    ��Wait, you just said I look good, right?��


    ��Yes, you look good, but good is not enough. You need to be the best person in the hall since you��re the main Man of the Night!��


    ��*sigh* Will this even end?��


    Hour or two have passed, I guess, since we��ve started preparing. Until now, I still have nothing to wear. I am starting to get exhausted, really. Basically, I��ve become a dress-up doll for Lori. She will point to a set of clothes for me to try then Nami will help me get dressed. That��s what happened since we started.


    ��Hey, this far too long even for someone special. What about the ball?��


    ��I guess they are waiting for you right now.��


    ��Hey! Hurry up!��


    ��Don��t worry, the Man of the night always arrives late, after all.��


    ��There are plenty to worry! Come on, Lori, let��s get this over with.��


    Lori crossed her arms and seems to be thinking. After that, she sighed and looked at me.


    ��Okay then, Hero. This is what you��ll be wearing.��


    Lori handed Nagi the clothes. Nagi looked at Lori with concern.


    ��Uhm�� Are you sure about this, ma��am?��


    ��Of course! That��s really what I want the Hero to wear, the others that he tried were just for my amusement.��


    ��Huh?!��


    ��Well, never mind that. Nagi, help the Hero wear that.��


    ��Y-yes ma��am!��


    Nagi helped me wear the clothes that Lori provided me. As soon as I am done wearing the clothes, I looked at the mirror. What I saw was really�� unexpected.


    I was wearing a glossy looking black long-sleeves with white highlights and what appears to be cotton or white feather, whatever, surrounding the hem in the wrist, the pants were also black with white highlights, black shoes that looks like it��s made with animal skin and a white cape on my side, covering the left part of my body. Everything looks like it was made with only the exclusive materials. I was overwhelmed on how simple, yet jaw-dropping the clothes were.


    ��Just like what I thought! It��s gotta be Black, I��m right!��


    Lori looks like she��s celebrating or whatever while Nagi looked at me with amazement.


    ��I�� don��t know what to say. Lori, Nagi, thanks for helping me preparing. This looks really good on me!��


    ��Right? That suits you really good. Now, get going! Don��t let your companion and the crowd wait any longer.��


    Lori pushed me out of the room and pointed me to where the Dance Hall is. She then slammed the door on me.


    ��That��s our room, right? *sigh*��


    I head towards the Dance Hall where the party is being held.


    The corridors where noticeably empty. There are also various painting hanging in the wall, some are self-portrait and others are different things and places. Everything gives an expensive vibe around them, no less from a real castle. This corridor alone might have cost thousands of gold coins from the paintings alone.


    Soon after, I heard the music playing at the end of the corridor. Looks like the party has started. I walked faster to reach the hall immediately. As I stepped foot on the Hall, all eyes were on me. Everyone looks confused. Looks like they don��t know who I am yet.


    The King then looked at my direction then smiled.


    ��Everyone! May I have your attention?��


    Everyone looked at the King.


    ��The Ball tonight is held to celebrate the arrival of the Hero who slayed the Demon King Troskaldt. Let us welcome, Sir Johannes Aarvold, The Hero of Laotea!��


    He then pointed at me, causing everyone to look at me. Suddenly, the Hall is filled with cheering and applause.


    I can hear different cheers from every person in the room. Some were thanking me, some were praising me and others are shouting my name or their cheers.


    ��Sir Johannes, would you mind offering a cheer?��


    I head up front and looked at the crowd.


    ��Everyone, I offer my thanks to all of you who came in this ball. I thank all of you for the warm welcome. And for the King, I thank you for letting us visit Grandiosa. I can only say that Grandiosa is a really beautiful Kingdom with a very welcoming citizens. Let��s enjoy this night and have fun. Cheers!��


    ������Cheers!������


    Everyone was in the mood for the party. After I left the stage, the music resumed and the people started to talk to each other, is what I thought.


    After I went down and settle in a corner, several people came to me.


    ��So, you��re the Hero huh.��


    ��Oh, he looks so valiant!��


    ��No wonder the Demon Lord doesn��t stand a chance.��


    They bombarded me with praise and greetings that I became overwhelmed.


    ��Uhm�� I apologize for being rude but, who are you all?��


    ��Oh! We apologized for the late introduction. We are the lords of this Kingdom.��


    ��Lords?! I apologize for my rudeness. I appreciate all your praises.��


    The Lords then started praising me again.


    ��As expected of the Hero!��


    ��He��s even humble!��


    ��What a really good man.��


    ��Oh, how I wish he could marry my daughter.��


    The moment someone said those words, the lords stared among themselves then looked at me.


    ��You can marry my daughter, if you want!��


    ��Please marry my daughter!��


    ��My daughter is exquisitely beautiful, I��ll gladly give her hands to you.��


    Those are just some of the proposals I received from the lords about marrying their daughter. I am starting to get uncomfortable by now, they��re endorsing their daughters to me without their consents. I can��t help but feel sympathy for those girls.


    Suddenly, A voice called out on me.


    ��Sir Johannes?��


    I looked and saw the King,


    ��Your Highness! What��s the matter?��


    ��Can I talk to you?��


    The moment the King said that, all the lords dispersed and I was left with the King.


    ��What do you want to talk about, your highness?��


    ��You see, I want you to meet someone.��


    ��And who might it be.��


    ��You��ll see.��


    A girl approached us. She was wearing a yellow gown that reflects the light in the hall. She��s also really beautiful. So beautiful, it seems dreamlike.


    ��Johannes, I want you to meet my Daughter, Lorelei. Lorelei, this is Johannes, the Hero of Laotea.��


    ��It��s an honor to meet you, Brave and Esteemed Hero. I am Lorelei Targon, Daughter of Lucar Targon, the King.��


    Her voice is hypnotizing, just like the origin of her name. She has an aura of someone with high regards to themselves and that shows in her talking as well. She looks dreamy and troubled at the same time, contributing to her cold yet beautiful persona.


    She��s a bona fide Princess, is what I thought.


    ��Pleased to meet you, Princess Lorelei.��


    ��Lorelei, I want you to accompany Sir Johannes for a little while. I��ll just greet the other nobles.��


    ��I��ll gladly do it, Father.��


    ��Well then. Lorelei, Sir Johannes, I��ll be going.��


    ��Your Majesty.��


    I bowed to the King before he goes. After that, I looked at Lorelei.


    I don��t know what to say! It��s awkward!


    ��Uhm�� Sir Hero?��


    ��Your Majesty, can you please stop addressing me as Hero? You can call me Hans, instead.��


    ��Okay Sir Hans. If so, then I implore you to stop addressing me as a majesty or a princess, as well. Just call me Lorelei.��


    ��Okay, Miss Lorelei.��


    ��No! just Lorelei.��


    ��Uhm�� If that��s what you want�� Lorelei.��


    ��Good, Sir Hans.��


    ��You can drop the sir now.��


    ��No can do. I like calling you this way, after all.��


    ��If that��s what you want.��


    ��Okay then. So, Sir Hans, where are you from?��


    I offered the Princess a seat before I sit as well.


    ��I��m from a faraway land, you see. Where science governs everything.��


    ��How intriguing. Are you a noble in your land?��


    ��Actually, the concept of Royalty in our land is not common. It is practiced on some parts but majority is being govern by the people.��


    ��Govern by the people? How does that work?��


    ��In short, the well-being of the people is a top priority, not the one in power. The one who hold the power is selected by the people and if they don��t want him, they can replace him.��


    ��That sounds barbaric.��


    ��Not at all, Everyone is equal and free. That��s a really wonderful place for me.��


    ��As expected of the Hero. You prioritize your people than power. I like that side of you.��


    She then sticks close to me while looking at me in the eyes and trying to appeal. To be honest, I can fall for her any minute because of her features. But there��s something that��s keeping me from falling.


    ��Thanks, Lorelei.��


    ��If you want, we can discuss it personally in my room. We can also do something else, if you want. I will allow it, if it��s you.��


    She then tried to kiss me. Seriously, I am so close at grabbing the opportunity. She��s so beautiful, and I��m a Hero, what��s wrong with that. But I can��t.


    Before her lips reached mine, I whispered something to her.


    ��Can we please stop this, Lorelei, no, Princess?��


    She opened her eyes and looked at me.


    ��What are you saying?��


    ��If you really want to, then I��ll gladly accept your offer. It��s really appealing, after all.��


    ��Then why?��


    ��Because Princess, Uhm, Lorelei. Because you looked like you��re hurting.��


    ��Wha-��


    ��You can��t hide your feelings to me. after all, it��s written on your face.��


    The Princess looked shocked.


    ��So, can we please stop this now, Lorelei?��


    ��But�� Father will-��


    ��Let��s forget about your father. Right now, I don��t want to see you hurting.��


    After that, she teared up.


    I reached in my pocket and get a handkerchief.


    ��Here. If you don��t mind, would you like to tell me more about yourself and the source of your sadness?��


    She stared at me in spite of her, tearing up, as if she��s trying to determine whether I��m trustworthy or not. After a few moments, she started talking.


    ��It��s an unrequited love, you see. The Apple of my eyes, my dearest, is the Prince of Farendal. He��s a Prince of a Human Kingdom while I��m the Princess of a Larean Kingdom.��


    ��Are Humans and Lareans not on good terms?��


    ��Not really, but Lareans can��t trust Humans. Before the Demon King��s reign, Lareans and Humans are enemies. They treat each other with hostility. But since the start of the reign of the Demon King, all the Kingdoms joined forces, of course, Humans and Lareans too. Despite of that, the scars left from the countless fighting hasn��t been healed. That��s why, even though not boldly, the two races still harbor hatred towards each other.��


    ��And you fell in love with the Human Prince. That��s why it��s unrequited. Your father won��t agree.��


    ��That��s right.��


    ��Mind telling me about how you two met?��


    ��Sure.��


    She looked like she��s reminiscing while talking to me.


    The story goes like this: The Human Prince named Raphael saw the unconscious and injured Lorelei while he��s travelling. He disposed of the Demons and helped Lorelei. She was brought to a Manor to rest and get treated. At first, Lorelei do not trust Raphael. But still, he continued to nurse her. As time goes by, they got to know each other, and at the same time, the seeds of love began to grow in their heart. After Lorelei was completely treated, she said her goodbye to Raphael and promised him that they will meet again. Lorelei went back home and told her father that she was ambushed. Before she can tell the whole story, her father pointed the blame on humans. It��s not after Lorelei explained that Demons are at fault that her father stopped accusing the Humans. But still, the look in her father��s eyes made her afraid to tell him about Raphael, the human who saved her, the one that she loves.


    ��What a bittersweet story.��


    ��Some nights, I thought ��if I were not a princess, will we be able to nurse this love into fruition?�� But I can��t just compromise my kingdom just because of my feelings. That��s why I keep it hidden.��


    While she��s looking at me, waiting for my reaction, it reminds me of something.


    ��You know, your story reminds me of yet another story from where I came from. Two kindred spirits, born from opposite families.��


    ��What happened to them?��


    Well, I can��t say that they both commit suicide. That would ruin the mood. Why did Shakespeare made that story a tragedy, I wonder?


    ��Uhm�� they faced every problems and oppositions until the love they have were realized, resulting to uniting of their families.��


    ��Really?��


    ��Yes?��


    ��I see. I wish that I, We, can also do it. Both of us.��


    ��Uhm, I don��t think you would want to be like them.��


    ��Why is that? They fought until their love won, right?��


    ��I mean, you can��surpass them? Right! You can surpass them!��


    ��Do you think we can?��


    ��Yes! Of course!��


    ��Thank you, Hans. -��


    She held my hands and thanked me, with tears in her eyes.


    ��- You gave me the courage that I need, the push that I need. Thank you very much.��


    ��You��re welcome, Lorelei. Also, one more thing. Avoid any medicine that slows your heart beat or poison or any sharp weapon if you can.��


    ��Huh? Why?��


    ��Just to be sure. Don��t worry about it. Just steer clear of those things.��


    The Princess looked at me for a moment then she burst on laughter.


    ��HAHAHAHAHA! You��re a weird one, Hans.��


    ��That��s rude!��


    ��That��s a complement, you know.��


    ��I don��t know about that.��


    ��I know! Can we be friends, Hans?��


    ��Are you an idiot? We��re already friends, right?��


    ��HAHAHAHAHA! You really are a weird one. No one will even think of telling the princess that she��s an idiot.��


    ��That��s just who I am, I can��t change that.��


    ��I think I know your personality now. Don��t change! I like you that way. Thanks Hans, thanks for being my friend.��


    ��Sure! If you need my help, just call me and I��ll come to your aide.��


    ��Thank you, Hans.��


    The princess smiled. The first genuine smile that I saw from her.


    ��Can I change my mind? I want to accept your offer from before.��


    She looked at me, blushing.


    ��Forget about it!��


    She hit me lightly. After that, we both laugh. She��s more likeable now when she smiles genuinely.


    ��Oh, the two of you are already close, huh.��


    The King was in our backs without us noticing.


    ��Yes father. Hans became my friend!��


    I can see discontentment on the Kings eyes. Looks like she��s the one who ordered Lorelei to seduce me.


    ��Really? That��s good to hear!��


    ��That��s right, your highness. Thanks for allowing us to talk.��


    ��No problem.��


    The King glared at Lorelei for a moment. He probably thinks I didn��t notice it.


    ��Well then, I��ll leave you two be.��


    ��Okay, your majesty.��


    Lorelei didn��t reply, while the King walked away.


    I can see that Lorelei is scared. Looks like she��s afraid of her father. That��s why I decided to help her.


    ��Lorelei, I want to give you something.��


    She looked at me as if nothing happened.


    ��What is it?��


    I materialized a small bag. Lorelei appears to be amazed about what just happened.


    ��This is my ability. I can materialize everything that I can imagine.��


    ��What a powerful and useful ability.��


    ��Right? Anyways, this is what I want to give you.��


    I materialized a bracelet, a taser gun, a dagger with a very sharp edge like my wakizashi, and a smartphone like the ones I gave to Izuna.


    ��This bracelet will create a barrier that will protect the wielder to any attack and will reflect the attack to the attacker. But this bracelet is not that durable if you were to defend yourself in a fight with a strong magic user or in any strong physical attacks so be careful.��


    I put the bracelet on her wrist.


    ��Next is this, A Taser gun. Basically, it��s like a staff but you can aim with it and if you pull the trigger, -��


    I showed her where the trigger is.


    ��- it will launch two wires that will connect to your target and electrocute it until they are unfit for combat. You can charge it again with thunder magic.��


    I gave her the taser gun.


    ��next is this dagger. Be careful because that is a very sharp one. The sharpest that can be created. If you think it is necessary, then use this dagger. It can even cut other swords. Be careful in using it.��


    I hand over the dagger to her.


    ��Lastly, this is a smartphone. You can do many things with that. But the main purpose of that is to contact me in case of emergency.��


    I hand over the smartphone.


    ��You��re really giving this all to me?��


    ��Yes, because I know that you will use it as you deemed fit. Remember, all of this is not for bragging but for your protection. Don��t brag it to someone, they might want to steal it from you if you��re not careful. That��s all, I hope that you won��t have to use that, but if it comes to that, then I��ll help you.��


    Lorelei became teary-eyed again.


    ��Thank you very much. I can��t express how much I want to thank you for all your concern.��


    ��Don��t worry about it. Just live your life. I��ll be there to support you. Besides, that��s what friends are for, right?��


    ��Really, thank you.��


    ��If you��ll excuse me now, Lorelei. I still need to find my companion.��


    ��Okay, see you later, Hans.��


    ��Sure.��


    I went ahead and proceeded to search for Eri.


    ��I thought she��d be here before me. I should��ve asked where her preparation room is.��


    I continued to search for Eri in the Hall, but she��s not there.


    ��That Eri, I hope she��s not in a bad mood. Please, don��t attack anyone while I��m not present.��


    Looks like she��s not in the Hall, might as well try to go back to our room.


    I went towards the corridor heading to our room.


    I was about to go when I saw someone walking towards me. As the light on the Hall began to shine on that person, it revealed who the person was. It was Eri and something��s wrong. She��s�� She��s��


    ��Beautiful.��

 Chapter 16 – Continuation of the Ball… And How not to Deal with Hero’s “Friends”

    ��Beautiful��


    I was entranced by Eri��s appearance. She was wearing a Blood Red Dress with crinoline. The Dress is accompanied with black frills that highlights the Red Dress. She also has her make-up and her hair done. Her horns were hidden using a Red Beret. She looks extremely gorgeous than her usual self, while maintaining her usual aura. Beauty that can Definitely Kill.


    ��Huh?��


    She looked at me with confusion while she approaches me.


    ��Uhm, what? I didn��t say anything.��


    ��If that��s the case�� I must��ve just misheard something. So? How��s everything?��


    ��I was�� flocked. And I received a lot of invitation for marriage. Also, I have befriended the Princess.��


    ��Ok. in short, nothing worth talking about.��


    ��Yeah, you can put it that way.��


    Looks like she��s not interested about everything that happened.


    ��For now, let��s find a table. Let��s continue after that.��


    I extend my hands to her.


    ��Would you like me to escort you?��


    She stared at my hands, then she looked at me. After that, she just walked, leaving me behind.


    ��So, it��s a no.��


    I quickly followed her.


    While we were walking, I noticed that there are many gazes that��s following Eri. From the sons and daughters of the lords to the lords themselves. Looks like she had caught the attention of the attendees, men and women alike.


    ��There, that table��s empty.��


    She looked at where I��m pointing and head then head towards the table.


    ��You really won��t talk to me?��


    I followed her until we reach the table. She remained silent even after we reached our table.


    ��So, what took you so long?��


    She looked at me. She was smiling, which is weird enough in itself. Her smile seemed fake and feels like she��s trying to control herself.


    ��Nothing worth mentioning.��


    I can feel that she��s pissed off right now.


    ��Did something happened while you��re preparing? Were you attacked?��


    ��Not really. They were quite hospitable, you see. They brought me fruits for me to eat while I was being fitted. Though, I prefer if they were not laced on poison.��


    ��What?!��


    ��Oh, and there was a maid who tripped right in front of me. it really is dangerous to walk while carrying a poison-laced knife, you see.��


    ��Wait, what?��


    ��Oh, and the room is filled with traps. Nothing to worry about, right?��


    ��Stop right there! There are various things on what you said that is totally not to be discarded. You were almost poisoned and stabbed? What the hell is happening?��


    ��Well, of course. Because I��m a Demon, that��s why.��


    ��You��re a Hero��s Comrade, they should know very well not to mess with you.��


    ��Oh, you��re addressing yourself as the Hero now.��


    ��That��s not what this is all about!��


    ��Come on, don��t be so sketchy! After all, I tried my best to hold myself from killing everyone in that room, you know.��


    What she said intrigues me.


    ��Hmm, I didn��t know you have it in yourself in terms of controlling your anger.��


    ��It��s none of your business. Besides, you want to forge a relationship with this Kingdom, right? Not that I want to.��


    ��So, you understand what I��m saying earlier in our room!��


    ��Haaa! What a Drag. Stop looking so amused every time I do or say thing in unconventional ways, it makes me feel like I��m an idiot.��


    ��Oh, come on, I know you like being praised.��


    ��Shut up or I��ll Kill you.��


    She pointed a bread knife that she happened to reach, at me. She��s really angry right now.


    ��Try me.��


    She stared at me while pointing the knife in my neck. After a few seconds, she put down the knife and let out a sigh.


    ��Just stop being a pain in the ass. Will you?��


    ��Sure, I��ll stop right there.��


    I smiled at her and once again, she sighed.


    ��So? What should we do now?��


    ��Just go with the flow, I guess? That��s what I��m doing ever since I stepped foot in this hall. So far, it��s effective.��


    ��I��m not good with that.��


    ��I know. You��ll definitely kill everyone here without hesitation if I��m not here, right? They��re just insects, after all.��


    She said nothing.


    ��Okay then, I��ll interact with the other lords over there, feel free to not do anything.��


    Before I can stand up, someone approached us, rather, someone approached Eri.


    ��What a great evening, don��t you think?��


    ��Uhm�� Who are you?��


    ��I am not talking to you. I��m taking to the beautiful flower over there.��


    Looks like she��s talking about Eri.


    ��It��s a pleasure to meet a gorgeous lady such as yourself, in this occasion. May I ask your name?��


    Eri did not answer, she doesn��t even look like she��s interested.


    ��I think you should st-��


    ��I��m not talking to you.��


    I was told to shut up.


    ��So you��re a hard-to-get type, huh? I love girls like you. I am Artur Alexei, son of Karil Alexei, right hand to the King. Would you like to accompany me?��


    Eri��s expression��s starting to get distorted, looks like she��s going to burst anytime soon if that guy don��t stop.


    ��Uhm, I really think that you should st-��


    ��How many times do I need to tell you to shut up! Can you not understand words! Ha! So you��re the Hero, huh. I bet you just let your comrades subdue the Demon King and his generals while you wait to deal the final blow so that you will be praised as the Hero. I bet I can easily become a Hero if I were the one to attack the Demon King. You look weak, you��re not threatening, at all. You��re not even born a noble, am I right? Commoners like you should just stay where they are and obey us, your gods. So, can you stay quiet while I take the beautiful lady to have fun? Before I am forced to kick your ass, that is.��


    I clenched my fist. This brat really needs to know a lesson or two about pain and how not to talk to me.


    ��Okay, you can do as you please, I will not interfere. Eri, you can do what you want with him.��


    Artur strike a pose, as if trying to be cool.


    ��So, your name is Eri, huh. That��s a beautiful name! come on, let��s go have some fun!��


    Artur grabbed Eri by the arm and tries to drag her.


    ���� me.��


    Eri began to murmur.


    ��Huh? What did you say?��


    ��Don��t touch me.��


    Eri said in a cold, stern, yet composed and relaxed voice.


    ��Oh come on, it��s just a touch! We can do a lot more later at our mansion, I know you��d like what I have in store.��


    ��Did you not hear me? I said don��t touch me.��


    I can feel a lot hostility and bloodlust towards Eri��s voice. Looks like one more push and she��ll go full berserk. I kind of want to see that, moreover when I think that the brat will be the one to receive it all.


    ��Don��t be a bitch and just follow me!��


    ��I said�� DO NOT TOUCH ME!!!��This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it.


    Artur was sent flying at high speed all the way to the opposite wall.


    ��Did anyone ever told you to respect someone stronger than you? That��s what you get, you asshole.��


    Everyone in the Hall was stunned about what they just saw, even the music players stopped playing music due to their shock.


    ��He pissed me off. I warned him three times, it��s his fault for not listening to it.��


    ��That, we can agree on. That was awesome, by the way. The way you sent her flying, is pleasing to the eyes.��


    ��But not as fulfilling as straight up beheading him.��


    ��Hahaha. Let��s not go there, Ok?��


    ��What have you done?! You imbeciles! Don��t you know who that man is?!��


    An angry man bolted towards our direction and began shouting at us.


    ��Uhm, he just introduced himself before Eri sent him flying so�� we are certain that we know who he is.��


    ��Then what have you done to my son?!��


    ��Well, he��s being a bother so, Eri pushed him a little.��


    ��A little? You call that ��A Little��?!��


    Eri is the one who replied.


    ��I didn��t even push him with all my strength, you know. I am surprised how weak your son is.��


    ��You��ll pay for this, you vermin. I am the King��s right hand and I will make sure that you will be executed! I don��t care if you��re a Hero��s comrade or what, you��ll be executed!��


    ��Oh, I don��t think so, Sir.��


    ��Stay out of this, Hero! This matter is between that me and that vermin!��


    I looked at Eri and saw her clenching her fist while smiling grimly.


    Yup, she��s seriously angry now, is what I thought.


    I don��t know what would happen if this doesn��t stop. Well, I actually know, she��s going to destroy a whole kingdom. But I don��t even want to think about it.


    ��Sir, your son made a mistake to not listen to me. I implore you to not make the same mistake as him.��


    ��You��re just a lowly commoner! Don��t you dare oppose a noble like me! I don��t care if you��re a hero or not, I will make sure that you will suffer if you oppose me!��


    I stood up and went in front of him.


    ��Sir, this will be my final warning. Leave us alone and forget about what happened. This is for your safety and everyone else��s.��


    ��You, filthy commoner!��


    Karil snatched a sword from a guard nearby and ran straight towards me while shouting ��DIE!��.


    Okay, that��s it.


    I directed raw, untapped bloodlust to him. The moment he felt that, he froze in place. Everyone else in the Hall was confused about why he stopped. I then went ahead towards where he is. After reaching him, I retrieve the sword that he��s holding and return it to the guard. After that, I returned to where he is and put my hands onto his shoulder.


    ��I am really grateful for listening to a selfish request of mine. I can really see how compassionate are you. Thank you very much, sir lord.��


    After saying those, I hugged him and told him something that only the two of us can hear.


    ��Don��t mess with me, or everyone close to me, anymore. If you do, you��ll wish that you��ve settled for my bloodlust, okay?��


    No response.


    ��Do you understand me?��


    No response.


    ��If you agree, then nod. If you didn��t, I��ll take that as you opposing me and I will deal with you immediately, are we clear?��


    This time, he nodded.


    ��Good.��


    I pulled myself away and smiled at him.


    ��Thank you for understanding, Lord Karil.��


    He was pale when I left him. After that, he walked towards a seat while staring blankly.


    I returned to our seat and the music resumed and everyone else minded their own business, as if nothing happened.


    Eri seems to be staring at me while I��m walking towards her. After I reached our table, she lightly slammed the table.


    ��I don��t require your help that time. I could��ve handled it myself.��


    ��Yes, I know. But your way of dealing with things usually involves blood, right? I just want to avoid unnecessary bloodshed.��


    Eri averted her gaze away from me.


    Once again, the air between Eri and I became awkward. Or am I the only one that felt that? I don��t know. But something tells me that I need to do something about this situation.


    And as if the gods have heard my resolve, the music in the Hall changed and, pair by pair, everyone went in the middle and dance.


    That��s it!


    I looked at Eri.


    ��Hey Eri.��


    ��What is it?��


    ��Let��s dance.��


    Eri looked at me. replied immediately.


    ��No thanks.��


    ��Come on, just this once!��


    ��No.��


    ��You really don��t want to?��


    ��How many times do I need to tell you?��


    ��Okay.��


    I stood up and looked behind her.


    ��You know, the moment I left this table, you will have to deal with everyone behind you.��


    Eri looked behind her and saw a bunch of young men attempting to talk to her and dance with her.


    After seeing those, Eri looked at me with eyes who wants to complain but can��t. she offered her hands to me.


    ��Just this once.�� She said while glaring at me.


    ��Ok, just this once.��


    I reached for her hands and we went to the dance floor. I put my hands in her hips and hers in my shoulder.


    The music that was playing is your typical fantasy-like orchestral piece that you can always hear in an opening screen of a MMORPG game. Even though that is the case, it still blends well to the current atmosphere. A suitable music for a dance.


    I tried to lead our dance and started with the usual swaying. I tried my best to match the pace of our dancing to the pace of the music.


    This reminds me of the school ball that happened last year. It really brings back good memories, specially, the part where I asked Mira to dance. I still can��t forget the feeling I had when we were dancing. Her bashful face and her cute puffs when our eyes meet. Everything about that event is really important to me, it feels like I��m in a bliss, now that I think about it.


    We were swaying for some time and there are fewer pairs in the dance floor now. I looked at Eri and she looks like she was getting bored. When she noticed that I was looking at her, she smiled and said:


    ��Hey, are you done leading me?��


    ��Huh?��


    ��I��m getting bored now. Mind if I take the lead?��


    ��Uhm, sure?��


    ��Good, now be careful and try not to lose footing. Also, try not to look like an idiot.��


    I can see mischievousness in her eyes.


    ��Be my guest.��


    The moment I said those, she stepped abruptly and straightened herself. She then grabbed my right hand with her left hand then she looked at me and said:


    ��Prepare yourself.��


    After saying that, she started moving, and I followed.


    Few minutes have passed and I can say with certainty, she��s a no joke when it comes to dancing. Her poise, the turns that she makes, the way she moved, the way she leads, everything she does screams professional. If a normal person tried to match her, they will undoubtedly fail. Lucky for me, I have taught how to dance before, when I was still in my old world.


    ��Oh, you��re not bad.��


    I was praised by Eri while dancing.


    ��You too.��


    ��I guess, this is enough for a warm-up. Are you ready for the real thing?��


    ��What are you sa-��


    Before I could finish my sentence, she suddenly changed the way she��s dancing. It became a lot more fierce and wild than before, it also picked up the pace and became hastened. The music also changed to match our pace. I looked around us and saw that no one else is on the dance floor, only the two of us.


    It became a lot harder to follow her lead. She was so disciplined, I can��t help but think that she��s a trained dancer. Her expressions match her way of dancing and her moves are completely in sync with the music.


    Because of her lead I managed to match her pace, although barely. And the dance became a lot more fun than I anticipated.


    <hr>


    As the music came near its end, Eri looked at me.


    ��Do as I say.��


    ��Okay!��


    ��Lift me! Now!��


    I lift her.


    ��Spin around.��


    I spun around. After that, I put her down.


    ��Now, spin me!��


    I spun her. After 3 spins, she said:


    ��Wrap me around your arms then dip me!��


    I did as I was told and dipped her right exactly at the music��s end. We stayed in that position for a few moments. After that, I helped her stand up, she then pulled me towards her and whispered something.


    ��You��re not bad for a brat.��


    ��Really? That��s what you��re going to call me? the dance was pretty fun though.��


    ��It��s good to have fun and all, but look around, the princess is missing.��


    ��What?!��


    ��The guards escorted her outside. Looks like orders from the King.��


    ��Oh, that? You don��t have to worry about it.��


    Out of nowhere, a window was shattered and 3 men were thrown inside the hall. One of them is the King.


    ��See? Nothing to worry about.��


    Eri pulled out from me and assume a guarding stance. While I stood there and stare at the one who did those.


    ��Hey Princess! Come inside!��


    The Lorelei was standing outside.


    ��I told you to call me Lorelei, right! We��re already friends after all!��


    ��Never mind that, come here!��


    ��Wait!��


    Lorelei went back inside the hall. As for the three who was sent flying, they were still unconscious.


    ��Hans!��


    The door burst open and Lorelei head towards me while shouting my name.


    ��Hey, Lorelei, Welcome back!��


    ��Good! Friends should call each other by names, after all.��


    ��That��s really not what we should��ve been talking right now, you know?��


    Everyone was stunned on what just happened. The fact that the King emerged from the windows and is unconscious is weird enough to see and comprehend. Even the guards just stood there and did nothing.


    Lorelei took a good look at her surroundings and said:


    ��Oh, about father? Don��t worry about him.��


    ��There are plenty of things to worry about in this situation, but let��s start with this: What happened?��


    ��Well, my father called me outside and we had a little chat about me not being able to seduce you. Things got out of hand and father hit me, but he��s the one that got hit. He tried to hit me again and again but he was the one that keeps on getting hit. He then called a mage and tried to attack me with magic, then that thing happened.��


    She points at the unconscious men near the broken window.


    Just like what I anticipated. The king looked so discontent before, that��s why I had to give Lorelei something to defend herself.


    Lorelei looked at me again and said:


    ��Come to think of it, After I told my father about the thing that I told you earlier, he became furious.��


    ��So that��s why!��


    ��Hmm?��


    ��Stop acting like you��re innocent!��


    ��I��m not acting, why would you say that?��


    I can��t deal with this girl. I never thought this girl has a huge gap in her character. I just let out a sigh and got over with it.


    ��So, what should we do now?��


    ��I��ll leave it to you.��


    I walked towards the unconscious King and tried to wake him up.


    After a few minutes, the King woke up while trying to cope up with the current situation.


    ��What happened?��


    ��You were thrown inside the hall, your majesty.��


    ��Inside the hall? What?��


    He appears to be a little groggy and is still trying to remember what happened. After a few seconds, his expressions changed and he immediately looked at Lorelei.


    ��You!��


    Everyone then looked at where the King is pointing at.


    ��You, ungrateful child!��


    The King then stood up.


    ��You dared to go against me? The King?! If that��s what you want then fine!��


    He called the guards and they surrounded Lorelei.


    ��You are no longer fit to inherit the throne! I hereby disown you and charge you with high treason! You will be sentenced to death by beheading!��


    The guards slowly closed in towards Lorelei. Since we��re near Lorelei, we��re also inside the closing circle. Looks like the King intended us three to be caught. Maybe he associated the fact that he can��t seem to hit Lorelei, with me who might��ve done something for that to happen.


    ��What now, Hans? Looks like they want us too, not only the Princess.��


    The princess looks like she��s enjoying the current development. I��m so going to scold this girl later.


    ��Looks like we need to assert our position yet again. *sigh* He should��ve learn by now that it��s not good to mess with us, right?��


    ��Should I handle them all?��


    Eri looked like she��s trying to hide her excitement.


    ��No, stay put.��


    ��Huh?! Why?!��


    ��You��ll definitely kill them. That won��t do.��


    ��That would be the easiest way to assert fear, you know. Trust me, I know what I��m doing.��


    ��Just let me handle this one, please?��


    ��Whatever.��


    Eri shrugged me.


    ��Well then, -��


    As the guards�� spears are drawing near, I called out to the King.


    ��- I know you��re angry, your majesty. But this is the second time you tried to take us in. You should��ve known by now not to mess with us, right?��


    I used my ability to make the temperature around me, cold. After that, I let my bloodlust ooze out. It��s true that killing is the best way to instill fear, but the same can be said you make them feel chills run on their spines, literally.


    As if to show that I��m right, the guards surrounding us stepped back and dropped their weapons. The King, even if he��s not showing it, seems to be taken aback by what happened.


    ��Good instincts.��


    I went to where the King is standing. Upon reaching, I whispered something to him.


    ��I hope that you learned your lesson now. We are quite fond of this Kingdom, you see, and I would not want to see it crumble because of wrong judgement by the King. Lorelei is my friend, and I will not turn my back away if they are in need or in danger. She��ll be the next in line of succession for the crown and If you tried to make her ineligible for the crown or hurt her again, I��ll make sure that this kingdom will not be able to rebuild again, ever. Understood, Lucar? Oh, and just so you know, We will know if something happened to her even if we��re not here so, I would advise not to do any underhanded measures just because we��re not here anymore.��


    The King is left standing. He then nodded once and ordered the guards to retreat. The crowd was left stunned and nothing to do. The atmosphere of uneasiness flooded the whole room and it��s because of us. The King and the guards then left the hall.


    Eri and Lorelei approached me afterwards.


    ��Thanks for protecting me from my father. I appreciate it.��


    ��Don��t mention it, that��s what friends are for, right?��


    Lorelei smiled.


    ��Really, thank you.��


    Damn, she��s cute when she smiles.


    Eri suddenly pat my back hard enough to make a loud sound.


    ��Threatening the King? Not bad. So? What��s our next move?��


    ��First, stop slapping me in the back.��


    Eri stopped and looked at me while waiting for an answer.


    ��Well, we wait.��


    ��Just that?�� Eri said while sounding a bit disappointed.


    ��Since we��ve threatened the King, it��s only natural for his loyal subordinates to restore his honor. We should be expecting underhanded and blatant attacks while we��re sleeping, Heck, they might even attack us in our sleep. You know what I mean right, Eri?��


    ��Yup, it��s my time to shine.��